Revit MEP 2010

Imperial Tutorial

March 2009

©

2009 Autodesk, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Except as otherwise permitted by Autodesk, Inc., this publication, or parts thereof, may not be reproduced in any form, by any method, for any purpose. Certain materials included in this publication are reprinted with the permission of the copyright holder. Disclaimer THIS PUBLICATION AND THE INFORMATION CONTAINED HEREIN IS MADE AVAILABLE BY AUTODESK, INC. "AS IS." AUTODESK, INC. DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE REGARDING THESE MATERIALS. Trademarks The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk, Inc., in the USA and other countries: 3DEC (design/logo), 3December, 3December.com, 3ds Max, ADI, Alias, Alias (swirl design/logo), AliasStudio, Alias|Wavefront (design/logo), ATC, AUGI, AutoCAD, AutoCAD Learning Assistance, AutoCAD LT, AutoCAD Simulator, AutoCAD SQL Extension, AutoCAD SQL Interface, Autodesk, Autodesk Envision, Autodesk Insight, Autodesk Intent, Autodesk Inventor, Autodesk Map, Autodesk MapGuide, Autodesk Streamline, AutoLISP, AutoSnap, AutoSketch, AutoTrack, Backdraft, Built with ObjectARX (logo), Burn, Buzzsaw, CAiCE, Can You Imagine, Character Studio, Cinestream, Civil 3D, Cleaner, Cleaner Central, ClearScale, Colour Warper, Combustion, Communication Specification, Constructware, Content Explorer, Create>what's>Next> (design/logo), Dancing Baby (image), DesignCenter, Design Doctor, Designer's Toolkit, DesignKids, DesignProf, DesignServer, DesignStudio, Design|Studio (design/logo), Design Web Format, Discreet, DWF, DWG, DWG (logo), DWG Extreme, DWG TrueConvert, DWG TrueView, DXF, Ecotect, Exposure, Extending the Design Team, Face Robot, FBX, Filmbox, Fire, Flame, Flint, FMDesktop, Freewheel, Frost, GDX Driver, Gmax, Green Building Studio, Heads-up Design, Heidi, HumanIK, IDEA Server, i-drop, ImageModeler, iMOUT, Incinerator, Inferno, Inventor, Inventor LT, Kaydara, Kaydara (design/logo), Kynapse, Kynogon, LandXplorer, LocationLogic, Lustre, Matchmover, Maya, Mechanical Desktop, Moonbox, MotionBuilder, Movimento, Mudbox, NavisWorks, ObjectARX, ObjectDBX, Open Reality, Opticore, Opticore Opus, PolarSnap, PortfolioWall, Powered with Autodesk Technology, Productstream, ProjectPoint, ProMaterials, RasterDWG, Reactor, RealDWG, Real-time Roto, REALVIZ, Recognize, Render Queue, Retimer,Reveal, Revit, Showcase, ShowMotion, SketchBook, Smoke, Softimage, Softimage|XSI (design/logo), SteeringWheels, Stitcher, Stone, StudioTools, Topobase, Toxik, TrustedDWG, ViewCube, Visual, Visual Construction, Visual Drainage, Visual Landscape, Visual Survey, Visual Toolbox, Visual LISP, Voice Reality, Volo, Vtour, Wire, Wiretap, WiretapCentral, XSI, and XSI (design/logo). The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of Autodesk Canada Co. in the USA and/or Canada and other countries: Backburner,Multi-Master Editing, River, and Sparks. The following are registered trademarks or trademarks of MoldflowCorp. in the USA and/or other countries: Moldflow, MPA, MPA (design/logo),Moldflow Plastics Advisers, MPI, MPI (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Insight,MPX, MPX (design/logo), Moldflow Plastics Xpert. Third Party Software Program Credits ACIS Copyright© 1989-2001 Spatial Corp. Portions Copyright© 2002 Autodesk, Inc. Flash ® is a registered trademark of Macromedia, Inc. in the United States and/or other countries. International CorrectSpell™ Spelling Correction System© 1995 by Lernout & Hauspie Speech Products, N.V. All rights reserved. InstallShield™ 3.0. Copyright© 1997 InstallShield Software Corporation. All rights reserved. PANTONE® Colors displayed in the software application or in the user documentation may not match PANTONE-identified standards. Consult current PANTONE Color Publications for accurate color. PANTONE Color Data and/or Software shall not be copied onto another disk or into memory unless as part of the execution of this Autodesk software product. Portions Copyright© 1991-1996 Arthur D. Applegate. All rights reserved. Portions of this software are based on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. RAL DESIGN© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 RAL CLASSIC© RAL, Sankt Augustin, 2002 Representation of the RAL Colors is done with the approval of RAL Deutsches Institut für Gütesicherung und Kennzeichnung e.V. (RAL German Institute for Quality Assurance and Certification, re. Assoc.), D-53757 Sankt Augustin. Typefaces from the Bitstream® typeface library copyright 1992. Typefaces from Payne Loving Trust© 1996. All rights reserved. Printed manual and help produced with Idiom WorldServer™. WindowBlinds: DirectSkin™ OCX © Stardock® AnswerWorks 4.0 ©; 1997-2003 WexTech Systems, Inc. Portions of this software © Vantage-Knexys. All rights reserved. The Director General of the Geographic Survey Institute has issued the approval for the coordinates exchange numbered TKY2JGD for Japan Geodetic Datum 2000, also known as technical information No H1-N0.2 of the Geographic Survey Institute, to be installed and used within this software product (Approval No.: 646 issued by GSI, April 8, 2002). Portions of this computer program are copyright © 1995-1999 LizardTech, Inc. All rights reserved. MrSID is protected by U.S. Patent No. 5,710,835. Foreign Patents Pending. Portions of this computer program are Copyright ©; 2000 Earth Resource Mapping, Inc. OSTN97 © Crown Copyright 1997. All rights reserved. OSTN02 © Crown copyright 2002. All rights reserved. OSGM02 © Crown copyright 2002, © Ordnance Survey Ireland, 2002. FME Objects Engine © 2005 SAFE Software. All rights reserved. ETABS is a registered trademark of Computers and Structures, Inc. ETABS © copyright 1984-2005 Computers and Structures, Inc. All rights reserved. RISA is a trademark of RISA Technologies. RISA-3D copyright © 1993-2005 RISA Technologies. All rights reserved.

Portions relating to JPEG © Copyright 1991-1998 Thomas G. Lane. All rights reserved. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. Portions relating to TIFF © Copyright 1997-1998 Sam Leffler. © Copyright 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. All rights reserved. The Tiff portions of this software are provided by the copyright holders and contributors “as is” and any express or implied warranties, including, but not limited to, the implied warranties or merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose are disclaimed. In no event shall the copyright owner or contributors of the TIFF portions be liable for any direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages (including, but not limited to, procurement of substitute goods or services; loss of use, data, or profits; or business interruption) however caused and on any theory of liability, whether in contract, strict liability, or tort (including negligence or otherwise) arising in any way out of the use of the TIFF portions of this software, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Portions of Libtiff 3.5.7 Copyright © 1988-1997 Sam Leffler. Copyright © 1991-1997 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute, and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that (i) the above copyright notices and this permission notice appear in all copies of the software and related documentation, and (ii) the names of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics may not be used in any advertising or publicity relating to the software without the specific, prior written permission of Sam Leffler and Silicon Graphics. Portions of Libxml2 2.6.4 Copyright © 1998-2003 Daniel Veillard. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the “Software”), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notices and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. Government Use Use, duplication, or disclosure by the U.S. Government is subject to restrictions as set forth in FAR 12.212 (Commercial Computer Software-Restricted Rights) and DFAR 227.7202 (Rights in Technical Data and Computer Software), as applicable.

Contents

Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
What is in the Tutorials . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 Accessing Training Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Chapter 2

Understanding the Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Understanding the Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Using the Revit MEP User Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Parts of the Revit Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 Modifying the View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18 Performing Common Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21

Chapter 3

Getting Started with MEP Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Creating an MEP Project . . . . . . . . . . Linking Projects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating and Applying a View Template . Modifying System Settings . . . . . . . . . Modifying General System Options . Specifying File Locations . . . . . . Specifying Spelling Options . . . . . Modifying Snap Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 . 30 . 34 . 35 . 35 . 36 . 39 . 40

Creating a Mechanical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45
Preparing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Placing Spaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 Placing a Space in an Open Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

v

Placing a Multi-Level Space . . . . . . . Viewing Zones in the System Browser . . Creating Zones on a Single Level . . . . Creating Zones on Multiple Levels . . . Working with the Analytical Model . . . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads . Creating a Zone Color Scheme . . . . . Creating an Airflow Schedule . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . .

. 56 . 59 . 60 . 62 . 64 . 69 . 72 . 75

Chapter 5

Designing Mechanical Air Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Placing Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems . . . . . . . . . Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79 . . 85 . . 92 . . 94 . 102

Chapter 6

Designing a Mechanical Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 109
Adding Mechanical Equipment . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout . . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout . Adding Valves . . . . . . . . . . . . Sizing Pipe . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inspecting the System . . . . . . . Checking Piping Systems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 . 114 . 119 . 128 . 142 . 146 . 149 . 151

Creating an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Specifying Electrical Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Defining Required Lighting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Creating Color Fills and Schedules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

Chapter 8

Designing an Electrical System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills . Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures . . . . . . . . . Placing Switches, Junction Boxes, and Receptacles . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Switch System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating Power Loads . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Panel Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Checking Your Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167 . 177 . 183 . 193 . 200 . 204 . 207 . 211 . 213 . 214

Creating a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219
Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

Chapter 10

Designing a Plumbing System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221
Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Creating a Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235

vi | Contents

Refining the Sanitary Stack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 248 Creating the Cold Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251 Creating the Hot Water System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Creating a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265 Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267
Specifying Pipe Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 267 Determining Zone Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268 Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270

Chapter 12

Designing a Fire Protection System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Adding Sprinklers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Piping System . . . . . . . . . . . Completing the Fire Protection Wet System . Adding Vertical Supply Piping . . . . . . . . Modifying Pipe Diameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279 . 284 . 289 . 294 . 299

Documenting a Project . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
Duplicating Plan Views . . . . . . . . Creating Dependent Views . . . . . . Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser . Creating Callout Views . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307 . 308 . 311 . 315

Chapter 14

Working with Annotations and Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Creating Annotations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Creating Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327 Creating a Legend . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 329

Chapter 15

Detailing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335
Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail . Creating Detail Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail . . . . . . . . Drafting Detail Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Importing a CAD Drawing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 . 338 . 348 . 353 . 364

Contents | vii

viii .

Introduction In this tutorial. 1 . you learn how to create and set up an MEP project. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to access the tutorial training files. Finally. You also learn how to use the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 user interface to perform common tasks.

2 .

Expand a title for a list of lessons in the tutorial.Using the Tutorials 1 This lesson provides information on how to get started with the Revit® MEP 2010 tutorials. This building is also used as the model in the Revit® Architecture and Revit® Structure 2010 tutorials. The technical training facility you design was a product of a design competition in Munich. including an overview of the building information model that you design in the tutorials. and plumbing fixtures. Add more detailed modelling elements. 3 . you learn how to design a building information model (BIM) in Revit MEP. NOTE You may find it helpful to print a tutorial to make it easier to reference the instructions as you work in Revit MEP. such as mechanical equipment. and plumbing engineering workflows. electrical panels. Add basic MEP elements. The Contents tab of the Revit MEP Tutorials window displays the available tutorial titles. electrical. The tutorials are also available in PDF format by clicking Help menu ➤ Documents on the Web in Revit MEP. fixtures. Expand a lesson title for a list of exercises in the lesson. You complete the following phases of design: ■ ■ ■ Import the architectural floor plan in either a 2D (DWG) or a 3D (RVT) format. and where to find the training files required to complete the exercises. such as duct. What is in the Tutorials In these tutorials. Germany. How the tutorials are organized The tutorials are designed to follow the typical mechanical. and piping.

Accessing Training Files Training files are Revit MEP projects. all content used in the tutorials is installed in the training files location to ensure that all audiences access the correct files. and families that were created specifically for use with the tutorials. Although this content may be installed in other locations on your system. you only draw the duct in one wing of the building. Imperial file names have an _i suffix. On the Contents tab. So. but only enough of a system to learn how to use the tools and options in the product. when you add ductwork. templates. Create detail views. however. In this exercise. Each training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. such as templates and families. 4 | Chapter 1 Using the Tutorials . When you open a training file. and sheets to document the project. you can complete any exercise without first completing the preceding exercises. The tutorial exercises are designed to be basic and brief. For example. The tutorials include a Training File section that references the training file to be used with the tutorial. You do not design entire systems. These elements enhance the exercises you complete. After completing each exercise. Contact your CAD manager for more information. the tutorials are grouped and presented in a recommended order for optimal learning. they are copied to the default location C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application Data\Autodesk\RME 2010\Training. to provide a richer and more finished design. as well as how to open and save them. Metric file names have an _m suffix. When you install the training files as instructed. you may notice that MEP elements are included that were not specifically added in an exercise. Metric: files for users working with metric units. NOTE Depending on your installation. However. the exercises and lessons can be completed in any order. it is recommended that you begin each exercise by opening the training provided. The training files include a starting point for each tutorial exercise. elements such as additional ductwork and equipment are incorporated into subsequent training files. you learn where the training files are located. Open a training file 1 Click ➤ Open. views. annotations. Use the training files A training file is a Revit MEP project that defines a building information model and views of the model that are used to complete the steps in a tutorial. is located and accessed in the training files location. Locate the training files The Tutorials option on the Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 Help menu provides a link to the installation website for the tutorial content and training files. and tags. IMPORTANT Content used in the tutorials. For example. your Training folder may be in a different location. you can choose to save your work.■ ■ ■ Analyze systems and refine MEP elements. Training files are grouped into 2 folders within the Training folder: ■ ■ Imperial: files for users working with imperial units. Create schedules.

You may close the file with or without saving changes. a list of file types displays. you should save this file with a new name such as settings_modified. the Open dialog displays. Click a file type to display the Open dialog for the specified file type. NOTE You are not required to save your work in a training file. For Files of type.rvt and make changes. Save a training file 5 To save a training file with a new name. 4 Click the training file name. and click Save. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For File name.NOTE If you click the word Open in the menu. 3 In the right pane. and click the Training Files icon. For example. click ➤ Save As. and you can open any supported file type. ■ ■ Close a training file 7 Click ➤ Close. depending on the instructions in the tutorial. if you open settings. verify that Project Files (*. If you click the arrow to the right of the Open option. and click Open. you are prompted to save the changes. You can save the file in the appropriate Training Files folder or in another location. scroll down.rvt) is selected. Accessing Training Files | 5 . double-click Imperial or Metric. select the folder in which to save the new file. A training file is provided as a starting point for each exercise. 8 If you have made changes. A good practice is to save the training file with a unique name after you have made changes.rvt. enter the new file name. 6 Complete the information in the Save As dialog: ■ For Save in.

6 .

the floor or roof remains connected. The edge of a floor or roof is related to the exterior wall such that when the exterior wall is moved. and Revit MEP coordinates that change through the entire project. In mathematics and mechanical CAD.Understanding the Basics 2 In this lesson. In this case. Understanding the Concepts What is Autodesk Revit MEP 2010? The Revit MEP platform for building information modelling is a design and documentation system that supports the design. You learn the terminology. quantities. and schedules required for a building project. If you move the partition. drawing sheets. the relationship of equal spacing is maintained. and plans. Windows or pilasters are spaced equally across a given elevation. and schedule is a presentation of information from the same underlying building model database. Revit MEP collects information about the building project and coordinates this information across all other representations of the project. the parameter is one of association or connection. You begin with the fundamental concepts on which Revit MEP is built. If the length of the elevation is changed. the door retains this relationship to the partition. ■ ■ 7 . drawings. What is meant by parametric? The term parametric refers to the relationships among all elements of the design that enable the coordination and change management that Revit MEP provides. hence. Building information modelling (BIM) delivers information about project design. In this case. This capability delivers the fundamental coordination and productivity benefits of Revit MEP: Change anything at any time anywhere in the project. the parameter is not a number but a proportional characteristic. sections. the hierarchy of elements. scope. The following are examples of these element relationships: ■ The outside of a door frame is a fixed dimension on the hinge side from a perpendicular partition. every drawing sheet. In the Revit MEP model. 2D and 3D view. and phases when you need it. These relationships are created either automatically by the software or by you as you work. As you work in drawing and schedule views. and how to perform some common tasks in the product. schedules. the operation of the software is parametric. The Revit MEP parametric change engine automatically coordinates changes made anywhere—in model views. the numbers or characteristics that define these kinds of relationships are called parameters. you learn what Revit MEP is and how its parametric change engine benefits you and your work.

dimensions. Model components are all the other types of elements in the building model. Element behavior in a parametric modeler In projects. sprinklers. Revit MEP uses 3 types of elements: ■ Model elements represent the actual 3D geometry of the building. grids. They help to describe or document the design. boilers. without requiring entry of data that is unimportant to your design. and 2D detail components are view-specific elements. ■ There are 2 types of view-specific elements: ■ Annotation elements are 2D components that document the model and maintain scale on paper. ducts. ducts. For example. boilers. When you change something. sinks. ■ ■ There are 2 types of model elements: ■ Hosts (or host elements) are generally built in place at the construction site. For example. and 2D detail components. tags. The first is the capturing of relationships while the designer works. Datum elements help to define project context. ■ 8 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . For example. levels. Revit MEP immediately determines what is affected by the change and reflects that change to any affected elements. Examples include detail lines. walls and ceilings are hosts. sinks. You do not have to intervene to update drawings or links. and reference planes are datum elements. Revit MEP uses 2 key concepts that make it especially powerful and easy to use. For example. The result of these concepts is software that works like you do. For example. tags. They display in relevant views of the design. and electrical panels. View-specific elements display only in the views in which they are placed. Details are 2D items that provide details about the building model in a particular view. filled regions. dimensions. and keynotes are annotation elements. and electrical panels.How does Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 keep things updated? A fundamental characteristic of a building information modelling application is the ability to coordinate changes and maintain consistency at all times. For example. sprinklers. The second is its approach to propagating building changes.

North . for example. Categories of annotation elements include tags and symbols. Having only one file to track also makes it easier to manage the project. you use levels to define a vertical height or story within a structure. they are implied by what you do and how you draw. The project file contains all information for the building design. By using a single project file. You create a level for each known story or other needed reference of the building. and ceilings. Often. the elements determine their behavior largely from their context in the structure. programming is not required. Revit MEP makes it easy for you to alter the design and have changes reflected in all associated areas (plan views. Revit MEP classifies elements by categories. Project: In Revit MEP. you can define new parametric elements in Revit MEP. or bottom of foundation. Revit MEP elements are designed to be created and modified by you directly. from geometry to construction data. Understanding the following terms is crucial to understanding the software. the project is the single database of information for your design—the building information model. categories of model elements include mechanical equipment and air terminals. However. top of wall. This information includes components used to design the model. For example. and drawings of the design. and so forth).This implementation provides flexibility for designers. Understanding the Concepts | 9 . industry-standard terms familiar to most engineers. such as roofs.Elevation View Element: When creating a project. section views. If you can draw. Understanding Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 terms Most of the terms used to identify objects in Revit MEP are common. Most often. schedules. In Revit MEP. views of the project. you can explicitly control them. families. and types. you add Revit MEP parametric building elements to the design. Category: A category is a group of elements that you use to model or document a building design. some terms are unique to Revit MEP. by locking a dimension or aligning to walls. Level: Levels are infinite horizontal planes that act as a reference for level-hosted elements. The context is determined by how you draw the component and the constraint relationships that are established with other components. In other cases. you must be in a section or elevation view. you do nothing to establish these relationships. To place levels. floors. elevation views. first floor.

You can create multiple in-place families in your projects. identical use. hiding. and wires. You can also display several project views at one time. Its interface resembles those of other products for Windows featuring a ribbon that contains the tools used to complete tasks. For example. and rearranging interface components to support the way that you work. ■ Because in-place families are intended for limited use in a project. but the set of properties—their names and meaning—is the same. However. ■ ■ ■ Revit MEP predefines the set of properties and the graphical representation of system families. A type can be a specific size of a family. pipes. For example. For example. System families include ducts. the behavior of a plumbing fitting is predefined in the system. Parts of the Revit Interface The Revit MEP interface is designed to simplify your workflow. A type can also be a style. and you can place copies of the same in-place family element in your projects. Read the following topics to familiarize yourself with the basic parts of the Revit interface.Family: Families are classes of elements in a category. or layer the views to see only the one on top. each in-place family contains only a single type. you cannot duplicate in-place family types to create multiple types. Then experiment with them. you can set the ribbon to one of the three display settings for optimum use of the interface. Instance: Instances are the actual items (individual elements) that are placed in the project and have specific locations in the design (model instances) or on a drawing sheet (annotation instances). Unlike system and standard component families. showing. and similar graphical representation. You can determine the set of properties and the graphical representation of the family. Using the Revit MEP User Interface Revit MEP is a powerful CAD product for the Microsoft® Windows operating system. System families can be transferred between projects. you can change the interface to better support the way that you work. They are not available for loading or creating as separate files. ■ ■ In-place families are custom families that you create in the context of a project. a lighting fixture could be considered one family. Different elements in a family may have different values for some or all properties. With a few clicks. Create an in-place family when your project needs unique geometry that you do not expect to reuse or geometry that must maintain one of more relationships to other project geometry. 10 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . A family groups elements with a common set of parameters (properties). such as default aligned or default angular style for dimensions. such as a 30” X 42” title block. Type: Each family can have several types. There are 3 kinds of families: ■ Loadable families can be loaded into a project and created from family templates. you can create different types of fittings with different compositions. You can use the predefined types to generate new types that belong to this family within the project. although the pendant lights that compose the family come in different sizes and materials.

To return the panel to the ribbon. Click a panel label and drag the panel off the ribbon to the desktop. To move panels: ■ ■ Click a panel label and drag the panel to a desired place on the ribbon. or drag the panel back to its original ribbon tab. Minimize to Tabs: Shows tab labels. Click the other side to expose a list of other related tools. click the Return Panels to Ribbon button. you can click the top (or left) side to access the tool you probably use most often. or moving a panel off the ribbon to your desktop. 2 The minimize behavior cycles through the following minimize options: ■ ■ ■ Show Full Ribbon: Shows entire ribbon. The ribbon can be minimized for maximum use of the drawing area. Ribbon Tabs and Panels TIP When you see a button that shows a line dividing it into two sides. Minimize to Panel Tiles: Shows tab and panel labels. To minimize the ribbon 1 Click (Show Full Ribbon) to the right of the ribbon tabs. Customize the ribbon by changing the panel order.Ribbon Overview The ribbon displays automatically when you create or open a file. and provides all the tools necessary to create your file. Parts of the Revit Interface | 11 .

. many of the tools you need to create the MEP design. and for switching views. tools used for adding 2D information to a design. and CAD files. When working on the Modify tab. select the tool first. many of the tools you need to create and modify a family of elements. third-party tools used with Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. The Add-Ins tab is enabled only when a third-party tool is installed. tools used for editing existing elements.. and settings. tools to add and manage secondary items such as raster images. tools for collaboration with internal and external project team members. project and system parameters. There are a number of button types on the ribbon Ribbon Tab Home Includes commands for. data and systems. architect-specific tools. tools used for managing and modifying the current view. tools used for running analysis on the current design. then select what you want to modify. Create (family files only) Insert Annotate Modify Analyze Architect Collaborate View Manage Add-Ins 12 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .Examples of button that can be clicked on two sides The following table describes the ribbon tabs and the types of commands they contain.

application button application menu Quick Access toolbar InfoCenter Status Bar Parts of the Revit Interface | 13 . a special contextual ribbon tab displays that contains a set of tools that relate only to the context of the command. when adding duct. A dialog-launcher arrow on the bottom of a panel opens a dialog. closes the application menu (double-click). This contextual ribbon tab closes once you end the command. To keep a panel expanded. provides requested information. By default. displays frequently used tools. displays information related to the current state of a Revit operation. click the push pin icon in the bottom-left corner of the expanded panel. Application Frame Overview The application frame contains tools and provides feedback to help you manage your Revit MEP projects. Placement Tools: contains the placement tools necessary for placing and connecting duct. Element: contains Element Properties and the Type Selector. provides access to common tools.Expanded Panels A drop-down arrow at the bottom of a panel indicates that you can expand the panel to display additional tools and controls. Contextual Ribbon Tabs When you execute certain commands or select an element. The application frame consists of five main areas described in the following table: Application Window Tool Description opens the application menu (single -click). a Place Duct contextual tab displays that has three panels: ■ ■ ■ Selection: contains the Modify command. an expanded panel closes automatically when you click another panel. For example.

(Save) save the current drawing with a new name.The Application Menu The application menu provides access to many common file actions and also allows you to manage your files using more advanced commands. NOTE Revit MEP options are set from Options on the application menu.. (Export) On the application menu. (New) 14 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . Access common tools to start or publish a file in the application menu.. select a file to open.. (Save As) export the current drawing. Click to access the application menu and perform the following actions: to. (Open) save the current drawing. such as Export and Publish.. click. select a template and create a new drawing.

or template file. and Walkthrough. family. publish the current project. cancels the last action by default and displays a list of all actions taken during the session. To enable or disable a tool item. annotation. click.. Camera. (Print) access product and license information. NOTE New displays on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down. saves a current project. but is not enabled by default. customizes the items displayed on the Quick Access toolbar. (Close) Using the Quick Access Toolbar The Quick Access toolbar contains the following items by default: Quick Access Toolbar Item (Open) Description opens a project.. or template file. provides views including Default 3D. (Publish) print the current drawing.. reinstates the last cancelled action and displays a list of all reinstated actions performed during the session. synchronizes a local file with that on the central server. enters selection mode and ends the current operation. (Save) (Undo) (Redo) (Modify) (Synchronize and Modify Settings) (3D View) (Customize Quick Access Toolbar) Parts of the Revit Interface | 15 .On the application menu. to. annotation. click next to it on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar drop-down.. family. (Licensing) close the file.

To show the Status Bar again. This displays the command history in a list. repeat the command. When you are highlighting an element or component. these items do not display and need to be re-added to the Quick Access toolbar. The Quick Access toolbar can display below the ribbon.To undo or redo a series of operations. When you are using a command. workshared components. check the Status Bar. the left side of the Status Bar provides tips or hints on what to do. or the Family Editor. displaying the same information. Group. However. items that are added to the Quick Access toolbar from the Create. NOTE There are some tools on contextual tabs that cannot be added to the Quick Access toolbar. Clipboard. It often displays tips or hints about what to do next for the current command. While in an edit mode (such as Modify Electrical Fixtures). 16 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down. Editable Only: Filters selections to select only editable. Clear the Status Bar check mark. or View Graphics panels persist on the toolbar for that mode. you can select any number of previous commands to include in the Undo or Redo operation. click the drop-down to the right of the Undo and Redo buttons. Modify. Getting Hints About What to Do Next If you start a command (such as Rotate) and are not sure what to do next. Filter button: Displays how many elements are selected and refines the element categories selected in a view. To hide the Status Bar. a tool tip appears next to the cursor. Starting with the most recent command. Exclude Options: Filters selections to exclude components that are part of a design option. Active Only: Filters selections to select only active design option components. Click Show Below the Ribbon on the Customize Quick Access Toolbar to change the display setting. In addition. when you switch to another editing mode. Several other controls appear on the right side of the Status Bar ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Press & Drag: Allows you to click and drag an element without it selecting first. the Status Bar displays the name of the family and type. Status Bar The Status Bar is located along the bottom of the Revit MEP application frame.

To change existing elements to a different type. When you place an element in a drawing. Its contents change depending on the current function or selected elements. Its contents change depending on the current command or selected element. On the Quick Access toolbar.To cancel or exit the current command. Options Bar The Options Bar is located below the ribbon. use the Type Selector to specify the type of element to add. View Control Bar The View Control Bar is located at the bottom of the Revit window above the Status Bar. Type Selector The Type Selector is located on the Element panel for the currently invoked tool. Then use the Type Selector to select the desired type. Place a Wall. It provides quick access to functions that affect the drawing area. do either of the following: ■ ■ Press ESC twice. click (Modify). including the following: Parts of the Revit Interface | 17 . for example. select one or more elements of the same category.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Scale Detail Level Model Graphics Style Shadows On/Off Show/Hide Rendering Dialog (Available only when the drawing area displays a 3D view. 1 Click ➤ Open.rvt. In the following steps. There are several ways to access zoom options. Understanding how to adjust the view will make it easier to work with the MEP design in the window. you open a training file and practice adjusting the view with the different zoom commands. 18 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. you are instructed to use a zoom command to adjust the viewable area in the window. After you are familiar with these tasks. Zoom the view In the tutorials. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. you may be asked to zoom to a specific region of a view or to zoom to fit the entire structure or floor plan in the view. Crop View On/Off Show/Hide Crop Region Temporary Hide/Isolate Reveal Hidden Elements Modifying the View In this exercise. The 3D isometric view displays: 3 Click Navigation bar ➤ Zoom In Region drop-down to display the zoom menu. (The Navigation bar is located in the top-right corner of the view. you learn how to modify the views within your Revit MEP project.) The zoom menu lists the zoom options. 2 In the left pane of the Open dialog. For example. click Training Files.

click . 5 Click Zoom To Fit. The cursor becomes a magnifying glass. Zoom is also available using SteeringWheels. the view zooms out from the mechanical piping design. The view of the MEP design is sized to fit the available window. 8 If you use a mouse that has a wheel as the middle button. Modifying the View | 19 . click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. When you release the mouse button. 4 Click Zoom Out (2x). the view zooms in on the selected area. 9 To display SteeringWheels. 6 Click in the drawing area. NOTE If the Navigation bar is not currently displayed click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and select Navigation bar. Use the wheel mouse to zoom out to see the entire structure again. In the drawing area. 7 Click the upper left corner and lower right corner of the region to magnify. use a zoom menu command to zoom out.NOTE Clicking the Zoom icon itself activates the currently-selected zoom command. If you do not have a wheel mouse. this is referred to as a crossing selection. Revit MEP uses the largest snap increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. NOTE As you zoom in and out. SteeringWheels provide 2D and 3D navigation tools. on the Navigation bar. To modify or add snap increments. and enter the shortcut ZR to zoom in on a region. you can roll the wheel to zoom the view.

Click and drag to orbit the design. 20 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . click 16 Click the Top compass direction indicator to switch to a Top view of the design.The Full Navigation wheel displays in the drawing area. press F1 while the steering wheel is displayed. press ESC. and then using the Zoom tool again. 10 Move the cursor over the Zoom wedge of the wheel so that it highlights. 12 Drag the cursor down or left to zoom out. For more information about SteeringWheels. ➤ Options. the wheel follows the cursor around the drawing area. and click tin the Options dialog. You can change the pivot point by releasing the mouse button. 11 Click and hold the mouse button. 14 To exit the wheel. click the SteeringWheels tab. The cursor displays a pivot point for the Zoom tool. 13 Drag the cursor up or right to zoom in. moving the wheel to the desired location. As you move the mouse. Reorient the view You can use the View Cube in 3D views to spin the design or reorient the view 15 Place the mouse cursor over the South compass portion of the ViewCube to highlight the direction indicator. To define settings for SteeringWheels.

referred to as shape handles. zoom in on the upper-left corner of the floor plan. Small blue dots. Similar controls. and tops of selected elements in elevation views and 3D views. display at the ends of selected objects in a plan view.17 Click the Home icon to return to the original view. and open Level 2 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the duct. After you are familiar with these tasks. These are the drag controls. it will be easier to work in Revit MEP and focus on the lessons of each tutorial. When drawing or modifying an MEP design. it is important to understand how to adjust the size of components in the drawing area.HVAC Plan . you learn to perform some of the common Revit MEP tasks that are included in the tutorials. Notice the small blue dots that display at both ends of the duct. as shown. called drag controls. bottoms. Performing Common Tasks | 21 . Resize an element using drag controls 1 In the Project Browser. Performing Common Tasks In this exercise. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . display along the ends. 2 Enter ZR.Design.

4 Click in the drawing area to deselect the duct. Move. All commands are canceled up to and including the selected command. moving the cursor up to shorten the duct. click the Undo command. you decide that you prefer to leave the duct as is. Undo commands 5 On the Quick Access toolbar. NOTE To quickly undo the previous action. In this example. All changes you make to a project are tracked. or press CTRL+Z. 6 On the Undo menu. Move an element 7 Select the same duct used in the previous steps. click the drop-down menu next to (Undo). Selecting the second item in the list will undo the last 2 actions. select the first item in the list. The Undo command allows you to reverse the effects of one or more commands.3 Click and drag the bottom control. on the Standard toolbar. 22 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics .

such as Move and Copy. After selecting the element to move. as shown. and drag it to the left as shown. In this case. Some commands. 9 Click the midpoint of the duct. Another way to move an element is to select it and drag it to a new location. 10 Move the cursor to the right. Performing Common Tasks | 23 . you want to move the duct. click to specify the starting position. The duct is moved to the new position. 11 With the duct already selected. for example.8 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. and click again to specify the ending position. require 2 clicks to complete the command.

click the drop-down menu next to supply return air duct. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.End a command Some commands. you can specify visibility settings for specific elements in an HVAC plan in order to enable the display of supply duct and disable the display of return duct. 15 On the Filters tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. Select Mechanical . such as the Modify Ducts command. Press ESC twice. For example. Click OK. you can also: ■ ■ Choose another command. (Undo) to redisplay the 24 | Chapter 2 Understanding the Basics . under Visibility: ■ ■ ■ Clear Mechanical .Supply. 13 To end a command. Override the display of objects You can control the visibility of objects in a view to display objects in specific ways.Return. Notice that the return air duct is not displayed. stay active or current until you choose another command or end the current command. 16 On the Quick Access toolbar. 14 Enter VG.

Performing Common Tasks | 25 .17 Close the file without saving your changes.

26 .

you can modify one template and use Transfer Project Standards to copy the changes to the other templates. and loadable families. click Browse. 6 Click OK. You then learn how to customize the template by modifying the project settings and discipline settings. and open Imperial ➤ Templates.Getting Started with MEP Projects 3 In this lesson you learn how to start a project from a template. 4 Select the i_Tutorial-Default. such as ducts and pipes. and click Open. Finally. click Training files. such as coordination review and interference checking. 2 In the New Project dialog. you learn how to start a project from a template. The first step in creating your office template is deciding which template to use as your starting point.rte template. A project template enables you to start a project by providing initial conditions. you learn how to organize the project browser to make it easy to view and access your project files. under Template file. settings. 5 In the New Project dialog. and modify system settings. You can choose from several templates. use copy/monitor. In that case. New projects inherit all the families. select Project. link files. or you can save a project and use it as a new project template. The template selection may vary depending on your installation. such as the default project units and settings. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. You can either select a template from the template library. the default building levels and standard views. and geometry from the starting template. system families. under Create new. Creating an MEP Project In this exercise. You may need to have a variety of office templates if your work requires it. You also learn how to use collaboration tools. 27 . create and manage views. Start a project from an existing template 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project.

select Project template. you can establish settings that are common to most projects. 11 Close the file with or without saving it. for Energy Data. click Edit. Click OK twice. Click OK. ■ ■ Under Create new. 13 In the New Project dialog: Under Template file. Modify project settings Project settings control the appearance of components and their subcomponents within a project. select Level 1. select Manchester. and select the Systems-Default_Imperial. TIP This template is the starting point for your new template. select School or University. 8 In the drawing area. 10 Using the same method. 18 In the Project Parameters dialog. If you want to use a template other than the default. Create a new project template based on the default systems template 12 Click ■ ■ ➤ New ➤ Project. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. navigate to Imperial Templates. expand Views (all) ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). ■ For Building Construction. click Browse.7 In the Project Browser. For example. click ■ ■ In the Building Construction dialog. Some templates are simple with respect to the predefined views and schedules. When you select the material. review the construction materials listed. 28 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . select Sub-Discipline and click Modify. 9 Close the file with or without saving it. In the Choose Template dialog. 16 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. you can select the materials commonly used in most projects. ■ ■ For Ground Plane. (Browse). 17 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 14 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. click (Browse). zoom to right side of the drawing area to view the level heads. and open North. under Energy Analysis. create another new project using the Construction template. Click Cancel. you can dictate its appearance in all views and when rendered. for City. NH. In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ On the Place tab.rte template and click Open. To maintain office standards and reduce rework. For Location. Notice that construction template is more complex than the default template and the view properties have been modified to maximize the use of various tools. you can select it now.

23 In the left pane. Click OK twice.rfa and I_Long Wire Tick Mark. 20 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. plumbing. 30 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings. 31 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. under Duct Settings. piping. 4 1/2". wiring. for 3 1/2". 27 Click OK. and fire protection systems. click Round. and 5 1/2". Modify electrical settings Electrical settings determine the voltage. After standard settings have been established for an organization. ensure that Hook Wire Tick Mark is selected. 4 1/2". 33 Click OK. Duct sizes that are not commonly used are removed from the sizing lists to avoid having them created when sizing or laying out ducts. and 12 1/2". Mechanical settings determine the behavior and appearance of the ductwork and piping for mechanical. 24 In the right pane. For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. For Categories. For Ground Wire Tick Mark. 25 In the left pane. Creating an MEP Project | 29 . clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. under Pipe Settings. Holding CTRL.19 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Group parameter under. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. Discipline settings can be defined for electrical and mechanical disciplines. and demand factors for electrical systems. for 3/4". select Identity Data. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. click Wiring. clear the check boxes under the Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing columns. 10 1/2". 29 In the Load Family dialog: ■ ■ Browse to the Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks folder. for 3 1/2". 21 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. select Views. power distribution systems. ensure that Long Wire Tick Mark is selected. 22 In the right pane. 32 In the right pane: ■ ■ ■ For Hot Wire Tick Mark. 11 1/2". click Rectangular. under Duct Settings. click Sizes. Define the tick marks that are used on wires by loading a family. 26 In the right pane.rfa and click Open. Modify mechanical settings Revit MEP has discipline settings that define the appearance and behavior of the system components in a project. 28 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. select I_Hook Wire Tick Mark. 5 1/2". they can be configured in a template file to avoid having to set them for each project.

Create a new project using the template created in the previous lesson 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project. 34 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down and click Browser Organization. An architect has created a preliminary architectural model for a building project using Revit Architecture. you link a Revit Architecture project to a Revit MEP project. For Then by. You can use these techniques to create templates that are customized to your projects. Close coordination between the two models is essential because the building envelope changes will directly affect the MEP design. click Browse. under Create new. you can specify the order in which the views and sheets are displayed in the Project Browser. Link a file 6 Click Insert tab ➤ Link panel ➤ Link Revit.Organize the Project Browser The Project Browser lists all the views. Notice that the file is saved as a template.Origin to Origin. 3 Select the template you saved in the previous exercise and click Open. you link the architectural model with the MEP model. select Sub-Discipline. and adjust the display settings of the Revit Architecture project. click Training. select Associated Level.rvt. In addition. 38 Close the file. Select Ascending Click OK twice. 35 On the Views tab of the Browser Organization dialog. Click Open. 5 Click OK. 4 In the New Project dialog. For Then by. You can also set filters to determine the number of views and sheets that are displayed. 36 On the Folders tab of the Browser Organization Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Group by. 30 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . 37 Save this file to a location on your local system. and groups that are contained in a project. synchronize the two models for monitoring changes. Linking Projects In this exercise. select Type/Discipline and click Edit. For Sort by. From the Positioning list. To enable this coordination. select Project. sheets. 7 In the Import/Link RVT dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. under Template file. families. You need to create the MEP model for the project. 2 In the New Project dialog. Select Imperial\Arch Link Model_i. You can customize the organization of project views and sheets in the Project Browser to group them into folders. select Family and Type. select View Name. select Auto .

The architectural model links to the MEP model and the current view remains active. 8 If necessary, reposition elevations in the plan view as shown.

Enable bounding elements for spaces 9 In the drawing area, select the linked architectural model. 10 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 11 In the Type Properties dialog, under Constraints, select Room Bounding. 12 Click OK. 13 Press ESC to deselect the linked model. Add levels 14 Expand Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? and open North - Mech. 15 Zoom to the right side of the building to view the levels.

Linking Projects | 31

16 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 17 On the Options Bar, click Plan View types. 18 In the Plan View Types dialog, verify that Ceiling Plan and Floor Plan are selected and click OK. 19 On the left side of the view, click the level line for 03- Floor. 20 Move the cursor to the right side of the view and click to insert the level line for Mechanical 3. 21 Repeat the previous steps to create another level line for the roof. 22 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Adjust level lines You can adjust the level lines in the MEP design to match the level lines in the architectural model. 23 Select the level line for Level 2 and click the value.

24 Enter 12 and press ENTER. 25 Repeat the previous steps to adjust the level line for Level 2.

32 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Monitor the architectural levels You can monitor the elements within a Revit MEP model, and when the monitored elements are not synchronized, warnings notify you of any violations. These violations happen when the original monitored element from the linked project has changed, a copied monitored element in the host project has changed, or both original monitored and copied elements have changed. Warnings may also appear when the original element in the linked file is deleted or the copied element in the host file is deleted. Using the Copy/Monitor tool, you can copy elements within a current project or from a linked project to a host project. This establishes a relationship between the copied and original elements, which helps monitor changes to the original element and report differences. After copying, appears above the copied elements, indicating that a relationship is established, and that the copied elements are monitored. If you modify a monitored element, a warning message displays, indicating that an element has changed. 26 Click Collaborate tab ➤ Coordinate panel ➤ Copy/Monitor drop-down ➤ Select Link. 27 In the drawing area, highlight the linked model, and click to select the linked model. The Copy/Monitor tab is displayed. 28 Click Copy/Monitor tab ➤ Tools panel ➤ Monitor. 29 In the drawing area, click the MEP level line labeled Level 1, then click the architectural model level line labeled 01-Entry Level. appears and the monitor tool ensures that both level lines remain coordinated. 30 Repeat the previous steps to monitor the level lines for level 2, level 3, and the level 4. 31 On the Copy/Monitor tab, click Finish to exit the Copy/Monitor tool. Disable the display of architectural levels 32 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Visibility/Graphics. 33 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click By Host View. 34 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 35 On the Annotation Categories tab:

For Annotation Categories, select Custom.

Linking Projects | 33

■ ■ ■

Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Levels. Click OK.

36 Click OK.

Creating and Applying a View Template
In this exercise, you create a view template and apply it to your project template. Create a view template 1 Click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ View Templates drop-down ➤ Create template from current view. 2 In the New View Template dialog, for Name, enter Mechanical View and click OK. 3 In the View templates dialog, under View Properties, for V/G Overrides RVT Links, click Edit. 4 On the Revit Links tab of the Visibility Graphics Override dialog, for the link file, click Custom. 5 On the Basics tab, of the RVT Link Display Settings dialog, click Custom. 6 On the Model Categories tab:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Model Categories, select Custom. Select Show categories from all disciplines. Under Visibility, deselect Parking, Planting, Roads, Site, and Topography. Click OK.

7 Click OK twice. Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser, right-click Views (Type/Discipline) ➤ HVAC ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation) ➤ ??? ➤ North - Mechanical and click Apply View Template.

34 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

9 In the Apply View Template dialog, under View Templates, select Mechanical and click OK.

10 Close the file with or without saving your changes.

Modifying System Settings
In this exercise, you learn how to control the system settings for Revit MEP. System settings are local to each computer and applied to all projects; they are not saved to project files or template files.

Modifying General System Options
In this exercise, you modify the settings that control your local Revit MEP working environment. These settings control the graphics, selection default options, notification preferences, journal cleanup options, and your username when using worksharing. Set graphics settings 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab. 3 Under Colors, select Invert background color, and click OK. 4 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new project.

5 In the New Project dialog, under Template file, click Browse. 6 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default.rte. 7 Click OK. Notice that the drawing area is black. 8 Click ➤ Options.

9 In the Options dialog, click the Graphics tab.

Modifying System Settings | 35

10 Under Colors, click the value for Selection color. 11 In the Color dialog, select yellow, and click OK. NOTE You can also specify the Alert Color. When an error occurs, the elements causing the error display using this color. 12 Click the General tab. 13 Under Notifications, specify the following options:
■ ■

For Save reminder interval, select One hour. For Tooltip assistance, select None.

14 Click OK. 15 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 16 Sketch a straight horizontal wall in the center of the drawing area. 17 Press ESC to end the command. 18 Select the wall.

Notice the selected wall is yellow rather than the default red. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 20 Place the cursor over the wall but do not select it. Notice that a tooltip is not displayed. However, the Status Bar displays information about the highlighted element. 21 Close the file without saving it.

Specifying File Locations
In this exercise, you specify default file locations. These settings control locations of important Revit MEP files, including your default project template, family template files, and family libraries. Set file locations 1 Click ➤ Options.

2 In the Options dialog, click the File Locations tab. 3 Under Default template file, click Browse.

36 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects

Notice that you can choose an industry-specific template as your default template.

TIP To view a template, you can start a new project with that template. Click and click Browse to select a template. 4 Click Cancel. 5 Under Default path for user files, click Browse.

➤ New ➤ Project,

6 In the Browse For Folder dialog, select the folder to save your files to by default, and click Open. 7 In the Options dialog, under Default path for family template files, click Browse. This path is set automatically during the installation process. These are the family templates that you use to create new families. It is unlikely that you would ever want to modify this path. However, there are some circumstances where you may need to modify the path, such as in a large, centralized, MEP firm where customized templates reside on a network drive. 8 Click Cancel. Specify library settings and create a new library 9 In the Options dialog, click Places. 10 In the Places dialog, note the list of library names. The list is dependent on the options that you selected during installation. Each library path points Revit MEP to a folder of families or training files. You can modify the existing library names and path, and you can create new libraries. An icon for each library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open, Save, Load, and Import dialogs.

When you are opening, saving, or loading a Revit MEP file, you can click on the library folder located in the left pane of the dialog. In the following illustration, notice that the libraries display as icons in the left pane of the dialog.

Specifying File Locations | 37

11 In the Places dialog. Save. 12 Click in the Library Name field of the new library. The new library displays in the left pane of all Revit MEP Open. 14 Navigate to C:\My Documents or a folder where you want to create a personal library of Revit MEP projects. 38 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . The library icons display in the order in which they are listed in the Options dialog. and select it as the library path. click the My Library icon. 15 Under Library Name. and click Open. and click (Browse). TIP You may want to create a new folder first. and change the name to My Library. Load. ➤ Open. or families. and click OK twice. templates. 13 Click in the Library Path field for My Library. click My Library. 18 In the left pane of the Open dialog. click (Add Value). and Import dialogs. 16 Click 17 Click (Move Rows Up) until My Library is at the top of the list.

14 Click in the drawing area. 26 Under Render Appearance Library Location. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Spelling. 10 Click File menu ➤ Exit. 6 Click File menu ➤ Save. 27 Click OK. you may want to set up an office library on a network path to increase productivity and maintain office standards. such as bump maps. 12 Create a new project using the default template. and decal image files. custom color files. click OK. 7 Click File menu ➤ Exit. This path is determined during installation. If you work in a large office. It allowed SHTMTL-CU because you set the spelling options to ignore words in uppercase. 15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 9 In the text editor. click Edit.Notice that Revit MEP navigates directly to the library path. enter sheetmtl-Cu. Notice that the spell checker allowed sheetmtl-Cu because you added it to the custom dictionary. view the current path. 11 In the Options dialog. 19 Click Cancel. click Places. Specify rendering settings 25 Click the Rendering tab. you can specify the locations of other files used to define render appearances. Under Additional Render Appearance Paths. 2 In the Options dialog. 13 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Specifying Spelling Options | 39 . 20 Click ➤ Options. 21 On the File Locations tab. 8 Under Building industry dictionary. 22 Select My Library. Specifying Spelling Options In this exercise. you modify the spelling settings and the custom dictionaries for Revit MEP. (Remove Value) to delete the library. If you want to relocate this path. 4 Under Personal dictionary contains words added during spell check. click Edit. scroll down to view the list of building industry terms. select Ignore words in uppercase. click the Spelling tab. This path specifies the location of the Render Appearance Library. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. specify the new location here. 23 Click 24 Click OK. 5 In the text editor. 3 Under Settings. Modify spelling settings 1 Click ➤ Options. and enter This is sheetmtl-Cu and SHTMTL-CU.

or use the shortcut keys to force a particular snap method. 4 In the New Project dialog. In this exercise. 3 In the left pane of the Choose Template dialog. you modify snap increments.. click in the Length dimension snap increments box following the value 4’ . 18 Click ➤ Options. 6 In the Snaps dialog. This command resets the spelling settings to their original configuration. Modify snap increments 1 Click ➤ New ➤ Project to open a new Revit MEP project. 40 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . and enter 1 . Revit MEP uses the largest increment that represents less than 2mm in the drawing area. click Edit.rte. 21 Under Personal dictionary. You can add an increment by entering the value with a semicolon after it. you modify snap settings. and open Imperial\Templates\i_Tutorial_Default. delete sheetmtl-CU. 20 Under Settings. click OK. The custom dictionary opens in your default text editor. Snap settings are system settings that are applied to all projects and not saved within a project file. 24 In the Options dialog. click OK. 2 In the New Project dialog. click Training Files. You can turn snap settings on and off. 25 Close the file without saving it. click Restore Defaults. Modifying Snap Settings In this exercise. 22 In the text editor. 23 In the text editor. click Close. click the Spelling tab. Notice that you can modify both length and angular snap increments. 19 In the Options dialog. 5 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. and use shortcut keys to control snapping on an instance basis. click Browse. click File menu ➤ Save. As you zoom in and out within a view. work with snapping turned off. under Template file. under Dimension Snaps. and then click File menu ➤ Exit.17 In the Spelling dialog.

Notice that the listening dimension snaps at 4’ increments. the listening dimension reflects the exact length of the wall as you move the cursor to the left or right. notice the 2-letter acronyms next to each object snap option. enter SM.7 Under Object Snaps. This dimension reacts to the movement of the cursor and numerical keyboard entries. zoom out until it does so. click OK. If it does not. 12 While sketching a generic straight wall. TIP To zoom while sketching. 9 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 10 On the Options Bar. zoom in until the listening dimension snap increment shifts to 1’. A listening dimension refers to the dimension that displays while you are sketching. you can right-click and select a zoom option from the shortcut menu. enter the shortcut key SO to turn snaps off. Notice that when snapping is turned off completely. This is the increment that you added previously. and move the cursor to the right. You can use these shortcut keys at any time when working on the design. 11 Click in the center of the drawing area. If you do not have a wheel button. After you click to place the object at the midpoint. snapping reverts to the system default settings. and only midpoint snaps are recognized until you commit an action. if you want to snap an object to a wall midpoint. For example. you can also use the zoom shortcut keys. deselect Chain. 8 In the Snaps dialog. such as ZO to zoom out. While sketching. use the wheel button on your mouse. Sketch without snapping 13 While sketching the wall. Modifying Snap Settings | 41 .

Notice that snapping is once again active. 23 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Snaps. 15 Click in the drawing area to start a second wall. the midpoint. and delete the value 1’ . Use snapping shortcut keys 16 Click Place Wall tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 18 Place the cursor over the horizontal wall you added previously. 42 | Chapter 3 Getting Started with MEP Projects . When you use shortcut keys to control snapping.14 Click to set the wall endpoint. This is the snap shortcut key that restricts all snapping to midpoints. If you move the cursor along the wall. 25 Click OK. 22 Move the cursor downward. the command is only active for one click of the mouse. click in the Length dimension snap increments box. Do not set the wall end point. with or without saving it. 21 Click to start the wall at the midpoint. and the wall edges. 26 Close the file. and move the cursor to the right. Make sure you also delete the semicolon. 24 Under Dimension Snaps. 20 Notice that the cursor now snaps only to the midpoint of the wall. it will snap to the endpoints.. Notice that the cursor snaps to various points on the wall. 17 Click Architect tab ➤ Build panel ➤ Wall drop-down ➤ Wall. 19 Enter SM. and specify the wall endpoint.

You also learn how to design a mechanical air system and a mechanical piping system. 43 .Creating a Mechanical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan mechanical systems.

44 .

methodology. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. In this exercise. Preparing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. you prepare a floor plan so that you can place spaces in later exercises.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. After finishing each exercise. you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis to determine the heating and cooling requirements for the building. 45 . you follow a series of lessons and exercises that teach the recommended system design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. go to http://www. you first configure the linked architectural model.autodesk. In this lesson. At the end of the tutorial. After applying a color scheme to the zones. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. water source heat pump (WSHP). This workflow begins with system planning and concludes with system designing. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. duct system and a hydronic piping system. and specific techniques for designing mechanical systems. If the tutorial training files are not present. and then you create a plenum level. As you create the mechanical system. By following the recommended workflow. you can choose to save your work. To create a mechanical system in Revit MEP.Planning Mechanical Systems 4 In this tutorial. However. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you begin planning the system by placing spaces in the building. you learn best practices for system design while understanding how Revit MEP makes systems design more efficient. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to design a mechanical system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. you will understand the process. Then you assign zones to the spaces in order to control the spatial environment. you first plan the system. Because most MEP engineers work with a linked model during system design. you design a mechanical system for an office building. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. This system consists of a cooling tower.

46 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Configure the linked model for space bounding The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. click Training Files.rvt. make certain that architectural elements (such as walls. select Room Bounding. you configure a linked model in order to begin designing systems in it. and after the linked model highlights. and floors) recognized as boundaries for spaces. not in the MEP training file. Add a Plenum level You create plenum levels so that you can place spaces in the unoccupied plenum areas (between the ceiling and the floor above) of the building. You must place spaces in all areas (occupied and unoccupied) of the building to create an accurate analytical model and achieve an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. NOTE When working with a linked file. you add a level for plenums. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_01_i. Next. The linked model is configured to place spaces using the linked building geometry to define the space volume. In this section. This makes the architectural components (such as walls. under Constraints. click to select it. 5 Press Esc to clear the selection. 3 Click Modify RVT Links tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. These components are defined in the architectural training file. 1 In the Project Browser. 4 In the Type Properties dialog.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. roof. and click OK. 2 Place the cursor over the linked model. ceilings. The status bar located at the bottom of the window and the tooltip indicate the Linked Revit Model. and ceiling) are defined as room-bounding. indicating that it’s the active view.

click Yes (this will happen every time you create a new level). 12 Click Place Level tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Preparing Spaces | 47 . and enter Level 2 Plenum. 13 Zoom in on the right side of the elevation view. 15 When asked to rename the corresponding level and views. This creates only a floor plan after the level is added. offset by the Offset value (8' 0" ) above level 2. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Levels & Grids panel ➤ Level. 16 Press Esc. A black datum indicates a reference level (the level is not taken into account during the creation of a view template). expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ MEP . and in the Plan View Types dialog. 9 On the Draw panel.MEP. Click the right endpoint of the Level 2 line.6 In the Project Browser. and a blue datum indicates that a plan view exists for the level. A new plenum floor plan view named Level 2 Plenum is created. For Offset. Verify that Make Plan View is selected. The new level is placed. verify that only Floor Plan is selected.Design ➤ Elevations (Building Elevation). and double-click West . Click Plan View Types. those categories in the Project Browser are listed as question marks. 14 Double-click the level name (Level 4). and click OK. 8 Click Place Level tab ➤ Element panel. Because you have not yet specified the view classification or sub-discipline properties. and select Level : Plenum from the Type Selector drop-down. ■ 11 Draw a plenum level above Level 2 as follows: ■ ■ Click the left endpoint of the Level 2 line to specify the start point of the plenum level. click 10 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ (Line). and is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. enter 8'.

right-click Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum Plan. For View Classification. you created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view in preparation of placing spaces. Notice that the site plan displays in the view. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. The view graphics are modified based on the template applied. select Level Above (Level 3).Modify plenum properties 17 In the Project Browser. select MEP . They contain information about the locations in which they are placed. you place spaces in areas of the building model. for Default View Template. For Cut plane. for View Scale. NOTE After finishing each exercise. You apply the default view template so that only the architectural floor plan displays. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Floor Plans. you use space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area. ■ Click OK twice. right-click Level 2 Plenum. In the View Range dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Primary Range. it is highly recommended that you always begin each exercise by opening the training file that Autodesk provides. The Level 2 Plenum floor plan is now listed under MEP . 20 In the Project Browser. In the next exercise. verify that 1/8" = 1'-0" is selected.Plenum. for Level. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. for View Range. In this exercise. For Sub-Discipline. However. Under View Depth. and click Properties. select Design. In this exercise. 48 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and for Offset. enter 0. Placing Spaces Spaces allow you to calculate the volume of the areas in the building. and click Apply Default View Template. click Edit. This information is used for heating and cooling loads analysis. for Top. and then place spaces in various types of areas. you can choose to save your work. verify that Associated Level (Level 2 Plenum) is specified with an offset of 0. Under Extents. Apply a view template 19 Open the Level 2 Plenum view. Under Identity Data. enter an Offset of 1' 0".Plenum ➤ Floor Plans in the Project Browser.

This specifies the vertical extent of the space. 2 Zoom to the empty room to the left of the corridor. Spaces can be created automatically and numbered in sequence by using the Create Automatically tool. 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is cleared. indicating that it’s the active view. 5 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. 6 Place the cursor in the room until the space snaps to the room-bounding elements (floor.Space Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_02_i. click Training Files. For (Tag Location). enter 0. For Space. Place a space 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select New. For Upper Limit. select Level 2 Plenum. Placing Spaces | 49 . You can also use the Highlight Boundaries feature to view boundary elements in the model. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. For Offset. and ceilings). select Horizontal. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. walls.

7 Click to place the space. enter 219. For Name. The software automatically zooms the new view to the same location as in the open view.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. for Number. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 50 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . enter Library. 9 Select the space. Notice that the space number and name now match the room number and name from the linked architectural file. 10 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Identity Data. Click OK. 8 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 14 In the drawing area. 13 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. ■ 11 Press Esc to clear the selection. double-click the section head in the Library to open the section view (Section 26). ensuring coordination between the files. Prepare the plenum view 12 Open Design ➤ MEP .

For Upper Limit. 20 Click in the Library to place the space. select Level 3. 19 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Tag on placement is selected. Placing Spaces | 51 . demonstrating the parametric functionality of the software. change the space name to Plenum and the number to 219P. Place a space in the plenum 16 Click in the Level 2 Plenum floor plan to activate it. enter 0. For Offset. Notice that the space is created in the section view at the same time. 18 Select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down.15 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and then click Modify. 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. 21 Using the method learned previously.

23 Click OK. and then split the space using a space separation line. 25 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Notice that the floor plan has updated with the changes. 52 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . you place a space in a large corridor area. Placing a Space in an Open Area In this exercise. under Energy Analysis.22 In the Instance Properties dialog. This is beneficial to split up large volumes for equipment selection and sizing. select Plenum and verify that Occupiable is cleared.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_03_i. and for Offset. enter 0. indicating that it’s the active view.Space Plan is highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. for Upper Limit. 2 Zoom in to the central corridor near the stairs. and then press Esc. verify that Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 On the Options Bar. Placing a Space in an Open Area | 53 . 4 Click Place Space tab ➤ Element panel. Place a space in an open area 1 In the Project Browser.rvt. click Training Files. select Level 3.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and select Space Tag With Volume from the Type Selector drop-down. 6 Click above the top stair to place the corridor space.

change the space number to 216A. In the schedule. 13 To specify the start point of the separation line. notice the corresponding architectural room name and number. and double-click the title of the plan view to maximize the view.7 In the Project Browser. click the endpoint of the lower wall in space Instruction 221. 14 Click perpendicular to the opposite curtain wall to end the horizontal separation line. 10 Using the same method. 54 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . double-click the space name. 11 Close the schedule view. and press Enter. the plan view would have updated with the changes. which was numbered 219Q. enter Corridor. and notice that the schedule updates with the changes. 9 In the floor plan. 12 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space Separator. If you had modified the name and number in the schedule view instead. 8 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. and scroll to the newly placed space. as shown. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Schedule.

18 Close the file with or without saving it.15 Press Esc twice. with an upper limit of Level 3 and an offset of 0. 16 Using the method learned previously. Notice the changed boundaries of the corridor space. 17 Change the name of the space to Corridor. The new space is numbered correctly (216B). Placing a Space in an Open Area | 55 . place a space in the lower area of the split space.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Spaces_04_i. Add a multi-level space 1 In the Project Browser. click (Flip Section) to reorient the section. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 2 Zoom to the chase between the male (226) and female (225) restrooms in the north wing. Click in the Male restroom to specify the section endpoint. indicating that it’s the active view. you place a space in a chase. and change the upper limit to account for the entire volume of the chase. Shading is a visual indication of where spaces have been placed (shaded) and where they need to be placed (empty).Placing a Multi-Level Space In this exercise. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section. and place a section in the view as shown: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click in the Cafeteria space to specify the section start point.rvt. 56 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .Space Plan is highlighted. click Training Files. If necessary. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Use the lower drag control to change the section boundary as shown.

for Upper Limit. On the Options Bar. For Limit Offset. right-click. enter Chase. Placing a Multi-Level Space | 57 . 6 Enter VG. 12 Click in the section view. expand Spaces. In the plan view. select the space. add a space: ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. Notice that you can see the space in the section view as well as in the plan view. enter 0. Under Identity Data. but that the space does not fill the entire chase. You enter a value that is above the level of the roof. enter 225PC. For Number. and click Element Properties. ■ ■ 14 Click OK. 7 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Override dialog. 8 Enter WT to tile the views. 11 Click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select Interior and Reference.4 Press Esc. for Name. select Roof Level. select Level 3. and then click OK. click in the chase area to place the space. 10 In the plan view. 13 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Constraints. For Offset. 9 Zoom each view as necessary in order to view the chase. for Upper Limit. 5 Double-click the section head to open the section view. enter 4'.

and click OK. Because the chase space is limited by a bounding element. and roofs) define the extent of space volume used in calculations. All spaces in the view are tagged. and maximize the view. 58 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . floors. You used space separation lines to create a new fully bounded area that was part of a larger area. the space displays the volume up to the roof only. under Loaded Tags. ceilings.Bounding elements (such as walls. select Space Tag With Volume.Space Plan. In the next exercises. You have created a plenum level and a corresponding floor plan view. 17 Type ZF. 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 15 Press Esc. and you placed spaces for various types of areas. you work with zones in order to control the spatial environment and perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. 19 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Tag spaces 16 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 20 Close the file with or without saving it.

After a space is placed in an area. 1 In the Project Browser. You can change the Occupiable parameter for each space. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Double-click Default to display a list of the spaces in the building model. To display space reference lines. Zones allow you to control the spatial environment and to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view.Viewing Zones in the System Browser After spaces are placed in the building. you view and verify zones in the System Browser. The different graphics in the System Browser indicate whether a space is occupiable ( unoccupiable ( ). Notice that Default is currently the only zone. it is automatically added to the Default zone. click Reference. and verify that All Disciplines is selected. click Training Files. which removes the space from the Default zone. Revit MEP immediately adds them to the Default zone. 3 Right-click in the System Browser. In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. click View ➤ Zones. NOTE A space cannot be placed into an area without being added to a zone. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . ) or Viewing Zones in the System Browser | 59 . under Spaces. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. The System Browser opens and docks to the right of the drawing area. The browser is a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones to which they have been assigned.rvt. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_01_i. The recommended workflow is to add each space to a zone that you create.

60 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click Finish Editing Zone.5 In the System Browser. under Energy Analysis. Using the Edit Zone tab. Next. double-click 121 Cafeteria. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. The graphic in the System Browser updates. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. you assign spaces to zones in the building. select Computer Lab 222. and Electrical 220 spaces. Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. The new zone is listed in the System Browser. The Zone tool is active.rvt. you can add or remove a space from the zone. 4 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_02_i. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. and verify the zones in the System Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog. the Edit Zone tab displays. You work with a single zone until you click Finish. you assign spaces to a zone. 3 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. and modify the zone properties. Instruction 221. indicating that it’s the active view. you will use the System Browser to confirm that the spaces are in the new zone. 6 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Reference. Creating Zones on a Single Level In this exercise. To display space reference lines. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. click Training Files. NOTE The Edit Zone tab provides zone tools and information. and a new zone is created. under Spaces. Assign spaces to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. As you do this. select Occupiable.Zoning is highlighted. indicating that the space is occupiable. and click OK.

and then select only Interior Fill and Reference Lines (clear Boundary and Color Fill). To view the zone in the drawing area. Instruction.In the System Browser. Click OK. Creating Zones on a Single Level | 61 . ■ The new zone displays with color fill and a zone reference line. Expand HVAC Zones. expand the new zone and notice that the Computer Lab. select HVAC Zones. 6 On the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog: ■ ■ Under Visibility. and Electrical spaces are added to it (and removed from the Default zone). The zone reference line indicates that the 3 spaces are in the zone. you need to activate the zone visibility. type VG. 5 With the drawing area active.

you can drag the zone reference line to relocate it and better view the spaces that are in the zone. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Name. In this exercise. indicating that it’s the active view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you assign spaces on multiple levels to a zone in the building. To display space reference lines. on the Model Categories tab of the Visibility/Graphics dialog. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels In this exercise. expand 2 . click Training Files. Create a zone for spaces on multiple levels 1 In the Project Browser. and click OK. NOTE All space reference lines have been hidden in the training file to provide a clearer view of the floor plan. you assigned zones to spaces that were on the same level of the building. 62 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Zones_03_i. verify that Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click Reference. and then click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Zone Properties. and verified the zones in both the floor plan views and in the System Browser. and verify the zone in the System Browser.Area B. click Finish Editing Zone. under Identity Data.rvt. 4 Enter WT to tile the 2 windows. 10 On the Edit Zone tab. under Spaces. You activated zone visibility in the views. 11 Close the System Browser. 2 Zoom in to Lounge 215 (to the right of the central stairs). Space shading and the space tags indicate spaces. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. 3 Open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . The new zone name displays in the System Browser.Area B to confirm that the 3 spaces are in it.TIP After you finish editing the zone.Zoning.West .Zoning is highlighted. enter 2 . In the left pane of the Open dialog.West . Rename the zone 7 Select the zone. 9 In the System Browser.

8 In the Level 1 . click in the Level 2 . select Lounge 120 to add it to the zone. Tag a zone 11 Activate the Level 1 .Zoning view. 9 With the Add Space tool active. 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category.Zoning view. Select Attached End.Zoning floor plan. 15 Press Esc. 14 Click in the Lounge space to tag the associated zone. Creating Zones on Multiple Levels | 63 . 7 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. 13 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ Verify that Leader is selected. 10 Click Finish Editing Zone. Verify that the distance is 1/2". zoom out. and add the Lounge 215 space to the zone.5 Click in the Level 1 . 6 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Zone. and then select the tag so that you can use the drag control to move it as desired.Zoning view to activate it.

double-click Level 1 . Front. Verify building information 1 In the Project Browser. Working with the Analytical Model In this exercise.rvt. double-click the zone tag. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.The tag only displays in the view where it was placed. enter Lounge . The new zone name displays in the System Browser. and click OK. and Left corners converge to orient the model as shown. 18 Press F9 to display the System Browser. under Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans. for Name Value. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In this exercise. You can expand the zone in the System Browser to view the spaces in it. 17 In the Change Parameter Values dialog.Zoning view. Because the heating and cooling loads calculations have not been performed. click the corner where the Top. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_01_i.Zoning to make it the active view. Rename the zone 16 In the Level 1 . and zone information. click Training Files. and view graphical representations of the spaces to verify space boundaries and volumes. you verify the building. 64 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .East. on the ViewCube. space. View a space 3 In the preview pane of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. you created a zone for spaces on different levels of the building. the tag displays “Not Computed” for those values.

The space for 109 Lounge highlights in red.4 On the View Selector (located below the preview pane). Right-click in the preview pane to access pan and zoom commands. The Isolate tool allows you to verify one or more spaces even if they are usually obstructed by other spaces or by the building architecture. Using the Highlight tool. 5 On the Details tab: ■ Expand 1_South_Lounge. verify that Wireframe is selected. ■ TIP You can use the ViewCube to spin/reorient the view. Next. With 109 Lounge selected. Click (Highlight). click (Isolate). and select 109 Lounge. you can verify that the space boundaries are as you defined them. ■ Click to deactivate the Highlight tool. NOTE Wireframe displays the volume of a space measured by the interior boundaries. The Details tab contains a hierarchical list of spaces and the zones that have been assigned to them. ■ Working with the Analytical Model | 65 . You can also view a space in relation to the other spaces or architecture in the entire building. you isolate the space. The space displays while all other spaces are hidden.

click . Verify space information 7 On the Details tab. You can use the Space Type Settings dialog to adjust settings as necessary. For Electrical Loads. For Construction Type. click . This specifies the number of people or the area per person for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Occupancy and Heat Gain (per person). click . ■ ■ ■ Next. and in the People dialog. This specifies the lighting and power loads for the space. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the zone. verify that <Building> is selected. select Lounge/Recreation. Next. 66 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . scroll down in the left pane. you verify information that will be used during a heating and cooling loads analysis of the space. All spaces in the zone display in isolation. Revit MEP provides default settings for space types. These specify the space usage and construction materials for the space. verify that <Default> is selected for Lighting Values and for Power Values. and click OK. Below the list of spaces and zones. 6 Click to deactivate the Isolate tool. For People. select 1_South_Lounge. and in the Electrical Loads dialog. and then click OK. 8 Verify the space information: ■ For Space Type. select 109 Lounge. and in the Space Type Settings dialog. and then click OK. the space information displays for the selected space.■ On the Details tab.

View the shaded model 11 On the View Selector. you use the Shading view to examine the inner volume of the model for voids. Below the list of spaces and zones. This indicates the cooling set point. verify that 70. NOTE Shading displays the inner volume of a space. cooling air temperature. The inner volume is bounded by interior surfaces of walls. roofs. you allow the values to be calculated by the loads engine. 10 Verify the zone information: ■ ■ For Service Type.00 °F : 54.00 °F : N/A is specified. verify that N/A : N/A : N/A is specified. This is usually preferable to indicating a particular percentage for those parameters.00 °F : 90. verify that <Building> is selected. ■ ■ For Outdoor Air Information. highlight and isolate the space for 109 Lounge to view its inner volume. verify that 74. Next. 13 Deactivate the Isolate tool. and zoom to the corner of the building as shown.Verify zone information 9 Select 1_South_Lounge. 12 Using the methods learned previously.00 °F : N/A is specified. For Cooling Information. and other room-bounding components. This indicates the heating set point. heating air temperature. and dehumidification set point. outdoor air per area. and humidification set point. NOTE By not specifying values for the humidification set point and dehumidification set point. and air changes per hour. floors. the zone information displays for the selected zone. Working with the Analytical Model | 67 . For Heating Information. This indicates the outdoor air per person. click (Shading).

Under Energy Analysis. and then click Place Space tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. For Offset. it doesn’t need to be included in the heating and cooling loads analysis. enter 212P. notice that Condition Type is Heated and Cooled. For Name. Click OK. 18 Click in the empty plenum area to place the space. for Number. ■ ■ Add the plenum space to a zone 21 In the drawing area. 15 In the Project Browser. select the zone that includes all plenum spaces for Level 2 (named 2_Plenum).Notice that there is a void in a second-floor plenum space. Notice that Condition Type updates to Unconditioned.Plenum ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 Plenum. select Plenum. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. 17 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Upper Limit. Modify space properties 19 Select the space. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. enter 0. select Plenum. 68 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . click Cancel. Under Energy Analysis. Because this is an unoccupied space. 16 Click Analyze tab ➤ Spaces & Zones panel ➤ Space. select Level 3. open MEP . Add a space to fill a void 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog.

for Energy Data. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads In this exercise. The report that is the result of this analysis allows you to determine the heating and cooling demands of the building. Specify project settings 1 In the Project Browser. you verified building. and then click In the Manage Place and Locations dialog: ■ ■ . select School or University. 23 Click Edit Zone tab ➤ Edit Zone panel ➤ Add Space. is selected. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_02_i. In this exercise.22 Click Modify HVAC Zones tab ➤ Zone panel ➤ Edit Zone. For Postal Code. click Edit. for City. 3 In the Instance Properties dialog. double-click Level 2 . and verify that the space has replaced the void. For Location. and viewed the spaces in the preview pane to verify space boundaries and volumes. click in the Value field. 4 In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. and you perform a heating and cooling loads analysis. and zone information. enter 03101. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Select Automatically adjust the clock for daylight savings changes. 25 Open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. space. On the Place tab. and select space Plenum 212P.rvt.Space Plan. click Training Files. NH. verify that Manchester. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 24 Click Finish Editing Zone. under Energy Analysis. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Information. you specify project settings that affect heating and cooling. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans. Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 69 .

first highlight it using the cursor so that the space crossing lines display. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Space Type Settings dialog. For Space Type. for Building Service.Audio Visual. ■ On the Weather tab. for Values. 6 On the Computations tab of the Area and Volume Computations dialog. verify that <Building> is specified. and click Element Properties. 70 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . and click OK. verify that Areas and Volumes is selected (default setting). For Ground Plane. ft. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Verify area and volume setting 5 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Area and Volume Computations. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is specified. and click OK. select space Library 219. after opening the Heating and Cooling Loads tool. For Sensible. For People. under Volume Computations. select Specified. In the People dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Occupancy. verify that Use closest weather station (Manchester Airport) is selected. click in the Value column. verify that Simple with Shading Surfaces is selected. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. Select Area per person. this option adjusts the times automatically. For Export Complexity. for Values. In order to select a space. For Project Phase. both. Click OK twice. verify that New Construction is selected. you need to select this option. For Condition Type. right-click. verify that Occupiable is selected. NOTE The Areas and Volumes option must be selected in order to perform an accurate heating and cooling loads analysis. If. For Building Construction.When the location is in an area that observes Daylight Savings Time. For Latent. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Energy Analysis. and enter 50 sq. verify that 1' 0" is specified. select Heated and cooled. select Specified. This is the parameter that determines whether a space is included in a heating load. ■ In the Type Properties dialog. a cooling load. and click OK. select Library . 8 In the drawing area. verify that Level 1 is selected. click Edit. enter 200 Btu/h. 7 Zoom in to the center area of the building. enter 150 Btu/h. Under Heat Gain (per Person). or neither. For Sliver Space Tolerance. you receive a message that the Areas and Volumes option is not checked and that the space volumes will be approximate. and then click .

If you have made changes to settings in the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 12 Click the Details tab. Select the space associated with the warning. and then re-open the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog to begin calculations. If a (Warning) displays for any space in the building.■ ■ ■ Click OK. You have verified the building information. verify the settings specified earlier: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Building Type. For Location. verify that Water Loop Heat Pump is selected. and under Heating Information. 11 On the General tab of the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. select Actual. You can view the building materials for this construction type by clicking Building Construction dialog). Perform a heating and cooling loads analysis 14 In the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog. 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Heating and Cooling Loads. You should correct the space error in the building model. you view the space and zone volumes in the building model. (Zone Heating ■ In the Heating Information dialog. 13 Under 2_Middle_Library. and can be modified here. and click OK. for Values. (opens the IMPORTANT The Heating and Cooling Loads dialog contains building information that only affects the heating and cooling loads analysis. it should be corrected before you calculate loads. is specified. click Information). Various factors (such as analytical and inner volumes of the spaces) are analyzed as Revit MEP performs the heating and cooling loads analysis. For Building Construction. click Calculate. Revit MEP stores this information as project information. for Values. verify that School or University is selected. select 219 Library. verify that Heating Set Point is 70°F . Analyzing Heating and Cooling Loads | 71 . verify that <Building> is specified. verify that Manchester. For Electrical Loads. The information for the space that you entered in the Element Properties dialog displays. NH. select Actual. and click to learn the cause for the warning. In the Electrical Loads dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Lighting. ■ Select 2_Middle_Library. click Edit. There should be no warnings displayed. For Building Service. Under Power. See Help for more information about the integrated heating and cooling loads analysis tool and its calculation methods. Next. Click OK twice. click OK to save your changes and close the dialog.

17 In the loads report. In this exercise. and zone information for the building model. 16 After you review the loads report. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. you can rezone the model as necessary to optimize equipment usage in the building. 15 Review the loads report for project. click the blue hyperlink for 219 Library. You are taken to the place in the report where the space information is displayed for review. select 219 Library. verify that Cooling Load by Zone is selected. indicating that it’s the active view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme In this exercise.After the heating and cooling loads analysis is completed. 22 Close the file with or without saving it. 72 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . 2 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. TIP You can find all generated Loads Reports in the Project Browser under Reports. or make any changes to the model. and a loads report displays. 19 In the drawing area. Assign a color scheme to a zone 1 In the Project Browser. For Color Scheme. 21 Click OK. weather. you performed a heating and cooling loads analysis on your building and viewed the loads report. otherwise the loads report or schedules will not reflect your changes. click to the right of the building to place the legend. NOTE You must perform a new heating and cooling loads analysis each time you modify building. you assign a color scheme to a zone in the building. 3 In the drawing area. under Energy Analysis. space. space. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . and then click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Zones. under the zone summary for 2_Middle_Library. 4 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Space Type. or zone information. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Space Plan. the Heating and Cooling Loads dialog closes. 18 Close the report and activate Level 2 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_03_i.rvt. click Training Files. review the Calculated Loads and Design Loads. Notice that the space information was automatically updated. 20 In the Instance Properties dialog. A color scheme allows you to communicate and identify parameters visually and spatially rather than by using space schedules or accessing element properties. Click OK.Zoning Load Fill is highlighted.

and click OK. select the color scheme legend. in 1-ton increments. Notice that the cooling load is based on tonnage value. You want a scheme that allows for a greater tonnage range. 8 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. The new scheme displays in the view. Creating a Zone Color Scheme | 73 .5 Zoom in to the legend. Select a different color scheme legend 6 In the drawing area. 7 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. select Tonnage Range. under Schemes.

Apply a color scheme to a section view 10 In the Project Browser. The colors are updated in the plan view to match the new scheme type. 11 Using the method learned previously. add a Cooling Load by Zone color scheme to the HVAC zones of the section view.The new scheme allows for a greater range of cooling load values. 9 Type ZF to zoom the view to fit the drawing area. open Design ➤ Zoning ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. 74 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems .

enter Space Airflow Schedule. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Analysis_04_i.rvt. for Select available fields from. select New Construction. ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify schedule properties 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ At the bottom left of the dialog. In this exercise. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. In the next exercise. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. For Phase. select Spaces. Instead of placing this schedule on sheets as a construction document. Select Schedule building components. you use it as a design tool to determine whether the correct amount of airflow is being supplied to each of the rooms in the model. You then use the schedule to adjust the air terminal airflow properties to more closely meet design requirements. For Name. you create a schedule that you use as a design tool for the supply air system.12 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a schedule for the supply air system project. Creating an Airflow Schedule In this exercise. you applied a color scheme to the zones in your building.Space Fill is the active view. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Report and Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. If you select Show categories from all disciplines. more category options are available. select Spaces. Define the schedule 1 In the Project Browser. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Creating an Airflow Schedule | 75 . Click OK.

For Type. For Discipline. Header.(minus sign) after Calculated Supply Airflow. 76 | Chapter 4 Planning Mechanical Systems . You format the Airflow Delta field to display as red when the difference between calculated and actual airflow is outside an acceptable range. In the Calculated Value dialog. Select Ascending. ■ ■ Using the method learned previously. select Calculated Supply Airflow. Click OK. and then click . For Formula. click (Browse). and then click Conditional Format.■ Under Available fields. Select Formula. In the Fields dialog. and click OK. and Blank line. ■ Click Calculated Value. Define conditional formatting for the airflow delta ■ In the Conditional Formatting dialog: ■ For Test. double-click: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Level Number Name Calculated Supply Airflow Actual Supply Airflow The selected fields are added to the Scheduled fields section. enter Airflow Delta. and then select Hidden field. In the Schedule Properties dialog. Define the airflow delta formula 5 In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. select Not Between. select Level. select Air Flow. For Then by. for Formula. add Actual Supply Airflow to the formula. ■ On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ For Fields. Specify additional schedule properties ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab: ■ ■ ■ For Sort by. select Level. select Number. enter . the calculated value named Airflow Delta displays under Scheduled fields and will display as a column in the schedule. select HVAC. For Fields. select Airflow Delta.

■ The schedule displays. you begin the designing phase by placing air terminals in the spaces. you created an airflow schedule and defined properties such that when the airflow delta is in an unacceptable range. Under Conditions to Use. enter -25 CFM and 25 CFM. In the Color dialog. Because no air terminals have been placed in the model. Click OK twice. 7 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click to access schedule properties. and all Airflow Delta fields are red for occupiable spaces. or right-click a column to hide or unhide it. click the color swatch. all the Actual Supply Airflow values are 0. you use the airflow schedule when adding system components to satisfy the required airflow. and you can manipulate the display of columns as with any spreadsheet. For Background Color.■ ■ ■ For Value. In the next lesson. In this exercise. and click OK. In later exercises. This concludes the planning stage of the systems project. Creating an Airflow Schedule | 77 . 6 On the Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Filter Unplaced or Unenclosed Items panel. Double-click the column boundary to expand the column to the width of the text. select red. When you select a field and click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Highlight in Model. notice that the software will test for delta values that are outside the range of -25 to 25 CFM. verify that Show is highlighted. a view opens that contains the selected space. the schedule gives a visual indication of the discrepancy.

78 .

learn a method to precisely place air terminals into the ceiling plan. and work with the airflow schedule. 79 . you size ductwork and validate your air system design. After completing the air systems lesson. you will create supply air systems. you place air terminals in the ceiling of the rooms. Placing Hosted Air Terminals In this exercise. After system creation. As you place the air terminals. you modify air terminal parameters.Designing Mechanical Air Systems 5 Designing air systems in Revit MEP is a straightforward and intuitive process. you will have been introduced to concepts and practices that you will use to design the piping systems. In this lesson. You begin your supply air systems design by placing air terminals in rooms and adding a water source heat pump (WSHP). Then. IMPORTANT It is highly recommended that you complete Designing Mechanical Air Systems before starting Designing Piping Systems. you use automatic layout tools and manual placement to create the primary and secondary supply air systems and ductwork to connect the components that you added.

and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_01_i.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view. 3 In the ceiling view. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 80 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .HVAC Ceiling is highlighted. and scroll to space 223.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 4 Click in the schedule view to make it active. 2 Double-click Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule. and then click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans ➤ Level 2 . 5 Select space 223 in the schedule. zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner. Prepare the design views 1 In the Project Browser. and notice that the space is selected in the plan view as well. click Training Files. When you highlight a space using the cursor. the space crossing lines display.

Multiple allows you to place multiple copies of the diffuser without reactivating the Copy tool after each placement. and select Supply Diffuser .Hosted from the Type Selector drop-down. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 81 . Notice that the lounge’s Actual Supply Airflow field in the schedule updates after the terminal is placed. the Airflow Delta is calculated accordingly. select the diffuser. as shown. and press Enter. If the host element is modified or moved. 18 Repeat to add a third diffuser. 11 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 9 On the Placement panel. enter 425 CFM. 15 On the Options Bar. for Flow. verify that Constrain is cleared.Add a supply air terminal 6 Click in Level 2 . type 12. and then press Esc to end the command. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. click Place on Face. 10 Click to place the supply diffuser in the upper left corner of the space. NOTE Hosted air terminals are placed at the height of the host. and then select both Copy and Multiple. 17 Move the cursor down. Copy the supply diffuser 14 With the diffuser still selected. The schedule updates with the new flow data. 16 Select the upper left corner of the diffuser as the copy start point.HVAC Ceiling to make it the active view. and press Enter. Also. Modify the supply diffuser flow 12 In the ceiling plan. which in this case is the ceiling grid. the hosted elements are updated as well. 8 Click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Element panel.Rectangular Face Round Neck . 13 On the Options Bar.Hosted : 24"x24" Face 8" Neck . click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 19 Place 2 additional diffusers as shown.

and the airflow delta value is within acceptable range.rfa. you load one from the library as follows: 23 In the alert dialog. 29 Place 2 diffusers. click Place on Face. select one of the diffusers. clear Leader.Tag diffusers 20 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 28 On the Placement tab. 82 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 24 In the Open dialog. as shown. As you place the return diffusers. Next. 25 In the drawing area. navigate to Training\Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\Diffuser Tag. you edit the return diffuser family in order to align the diffuser edges to the ceiling grid lines. and then press Esc. click Yes. Each diffuser has an airflow capacity of 425 CFM. 27 Select Return Diffuser . 22 In the drawing area. If alerted that there is no tag loaded for the diffuser object. notice that the insertion point snaps the center of each diffuser to a grid intersection instead of centering the diffuser between grid lines. 21 On the Options Bar.Hosted : Workplane-based Return Diffuser from the Type Selector drop-down. and click Open. select each of the 5 supply diffusers. Place return diffusers 26 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal.

as shown. select one of the return diffusers. under Other. and click OK. 35 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Reference. You change the symbolic lines to strong references so that they can be used to align to the lines of the ceiling grid. 32 In the Project Browser. and click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 33 Highlight one of the symbolic lines. 31 In the alert dialog. open Views (all) ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Ref. 34 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Instance Properties. Level. click Yes. and click to select the lines. 36 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. select Strong Reference. Placing Hosted Air Terminals | 83 .Edit the diffuser family 30 In the drawing area. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

37 In the Family Already Exists dialog, click Overwrite the existing version and its parameter values. Align the diffusers in the ceiling grid 38 In the ceiling plan, zoom in to the return diffuser at the bottom left of the Lounge. 39 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. 40 In the drawing area, select the vertical grid line as shown.

41 Select the right edge of the diffuser. 42 Select the horizontal grid line as shown, and then select the top edge of the diffuser.

43 Using the same method, align the other return diffuser, as shown, and then press Esc twice.

44 While pressing Ctrl, select both return diffusers, and on the Options Bar, for Flow, enter 650 CFM310 CFM, and press Enter. Modify the airflow display arrows 45 Select the return diffuser at the lower left, right-click, and click Element Properties. 46 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Mechanical, clear LeftArrow, and click OK.

84 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

47 Using the same method, clear RightArrow and DownArrow for the other return diffuser.

48 Close the file with or without saving it.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals
In this exercise, you place air terminals in a room that does not have a dropped ceiling. As you place the air terminals, you modify air terminal parameters and work with the airflow schedule.

Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_02_i.rvt.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 85

Add non-hosted air terminals 1 In the Project Browser, expand HVAC - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design to make it the active view. 2 On the View Control Bar, for Scale, click 1/8" = 1'-0". 3 Zoom in to space Instruction 115, at the lower left corner of the building. When you highlight a space using the cursor, the space crossing lines display, and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden. 5 Open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Space Airflow Schedule, and then click View tab ➤ Windows ➤ Tile. 6 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 7 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Air Terminal. 8 In the Type Selector, select Supply Diffuser - Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 - 8 Neck. 9 On the Options Bar, verify that Tag on Placement is selected. 10 In the drawing area, click to place the air terminal in the space as shown, and then click Place Air Terminal tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify.

The schedule was automatically updated with the actual supply airflow capacity of the diffuser. Also, the diffuser was tagged as it was placed. NOTE The software assigns sequential numbers to components in the order in which they are placed in a drawing. If you delete a component and subsequently place more of the same component in the same drawing, the number assigned to the deleted component will not be used. As a result, your components may be numbered differently than those in the training files. 11 Select the diffuser, and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Modify the diffuser properties:

In the Instance Properties dialog, under Constraints, for Offset, enter 8'. Because non-hosted components are associated with a level, the offset value is the height of the diffuser from the level. Under Mechanical - Airflow, for Flow, enter 360 CFM. Click OK.

■ ■

86 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

13 With the diffuser still selected, click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 14 Select the bottom left corner of the diffuser, move the cursor down, type 20', and then press Enter. 15 Press Esc. By copying the diffuser, you are also specifying the same offset and flow for the new diffuser. Notice that the copied air terminal does not have a tag.

16 Using the same method, select both air terminals and copy them 14' to the right.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 87

Tag existing diffusers 17 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 18 On the Options Bar, clear Leader. 19 Select each of the untagged diffusers, and then press Esc. Create an embedded schedule You enhance the schedule by creating an embedded schedule to show data (system type, type, mark, and flow) for individual diffusers in each space. 20 Double-click the title bar of the Space Airflow Schedule to maximize it, and then right-click in the schedule, and click View Properties. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Other, for Embedded Schedule, click Edit. 22 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

Select Embedded Schedule. For Category, select Air Terminals, and then click Embedded Schedule Properties.

23 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click System Type, Type, Mark, and Flow. 24 On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Mark. 25 Click OK 3 times. The schedule is updated and lists the data for individual air terminals in each space. Although the Airflow Delta value is within an acceptable range, it is a negative value. Next, you modify the airflow capacity of the diffuser in the lower left corner of the space to offset the increased heat gain of the southwesterly exposure.

88 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Modify an airflow value in the schedule You use the schedule as a design tool to modify the airflow. 26 Using the method learned previously, tile the windows. 27 In the schedule, under space 115, select SD 1-12-110. 28 In the embedded portion of the Space Airflow Schedule, for Flow, enter 450 CFM, and press Enter. 29 Using the same method, change the flow for SD 1-12-111 and 112 to 330 CFM. Each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project, because you are modifying the digital database of building information. This digital database information source is the integral concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).

The Airflow Delta value for the space updates to a positive number.

Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 89

Place air handling equipment 30 Close the Space Airflow Schedule, and maximize Level 1 - HVAC Plan - Design. 31 In the drawing area, select the zone (2-West-Area T) that includes space 115. As you highlight the zone, pay attention to the tooltip and the status bar to be sure you’re selecting the zone and not the space. The zone indicator has a line that spans all spaces in the zone, as shown.

32 Open the Instance Properties dialog, and under Energy Analysis, verify that the Calculated Heating Load value is 33807 Btu/h and the Calculated Cooling Load value is 3.9 ton (approximately 1.5 times the heating load). 33 Click OK. 34 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 35 In the Type Selector, select WSHP - Horizontal - High Efficiency - 2-5 Tons - Left Return - Right Discharge : 4 Tons. 36 In the drawing area, zoom and pan to the double door for space 115. 37 Press Spacebar twice to change the rotation of the pump so that the supply faces the space and the return faces away from the space. 38 Click to select an insertion point so that the supply is at the approximate center of the doorway. 39 Press Esc twice to end the command.

90 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems

Verify that the measured distance is 9'. click to select the midpoint of the bottom of the WSHP.40 Access the instance properties for the heat pump. 44 Zoom in to space 115. and verify the height of the WSHP: ■ ■ Click Modify tab ➤ Inquiry panel ➤ Measure drop-down ➤ Measure Between Two References. Placing Non-Hosted Air Terminals | 91 . Verify equipment mounting heights 43 Open Design ➤ Spaces ➤ Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 26. and click OK. ■ ■ For the end point. click the Level 1 line. enter 9' 0"2750. 42 Press Esc to clear the selection. For the start point. 41 In the Instance Properties dialog. for Constraints ➤ Offset.

3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. including energy analysis. 45 Close the file with or without saving it. However. After creating the logical connection. physical connections (ductwork) are not required for systems designing. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_03_i. they are necessary to perform calculations (such as sizing) that reference the physical geometry. A Revit MEP system is the logical connection between system components such as air terminals and mechanical equipment.Design is highlighted. indicating that it’s the active view. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. In this exercise. click Training Files. You then create the logical connection between the system components. verify that Design ➤ HVAC . IMPORTANT Unlike logical connections. you then create ductwork to physically connect the system components. 5 Verify that there are no Mechanical systems listed. 92 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise.rvt.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . When you highlight a space. You create air systems by placing air terminals and mechanical equipment. you create low pressure secondary supply air systems. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 at the upper left of the building. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. you also use the System Browser to validate systems.HVAC Plan . and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. and click View ➤ Systems. Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. right-click the title. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 4 If the System Browser title is Zones.Press Esc. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.

Creating Secondary Supply Air Systems | 93 . and then select the last supply diffuser in space 223.IMPORTANT In the System Browser. 16 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. the assigned diffusers move to the respective system folder. 15 Click Cancel. 11 In the drawing area. Notice that there are layout and system tools (Generate Layout. Note that the Flow value (1700 CFM) is equal to the sum of the flow values for the 4 diffusers you added to the system. 13 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. Notice that a mechanical system now displays in the System Browser. These tools vary depending on the equipment used to create a system. review the Number of Elements. Create a secondary air system 7 In the drawing area. On the Options Bar. All of the diffusers (air terminals) that you added are located under default systems categories in the Unassigned folder. 8 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Supply. expand Mechanical ➤ Supply Air ➤ Mechanical Supply Air 1. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 9 Click Modify Duct Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP assigned them to the Default Supply Air system. the number of elements is updated. select the supply diffuser at the upper left of space 223. As you add diffusers to systems. System Name. and Flow value. and Create Systems) available on the Modify Air Terminals tab. 12 In the System Browser. select the 3 supply diffusers shown in red and circled. 10 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Add To System. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy. Connect Into. Only mechanical equipment components can be highlighted and selected when you are using the Add To System tool. and drag it to the bottom of the screen so that it displays horizontally below the floor plan. Because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed. 6 Keep the System Browser open.

23 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ System Properties. 19 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Select Equipment. You used the Create Supply Systems tool to logically connect air terminals to the WSHP. you also use the System Browser to validate systems. you created low pressure secondary supply air systems for the building. 18 Click OK. which updates the name in the System Browser. The system name is updated from Mechanical Supply Air 1 to WSHP 2-45 in the System Browser. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Click Finish Editing System. 27 Close the file with or without saving it. access system properties to see that the flow value (2125 CFM) has updated to include the flow value of the final supply diffuser. In this exercise. for System Name. under Identity Data. you create ductwork to physically connect system components. Rename the system Next. highlight the value and click Ctrl+V to paste over the selection. you rename the system to match the identifying data (Mark) of the equipment properties. NOTE The organization of the Mechanical folder in the System Browser has changed so that the WSHP is the parent. and then select the WSHP (located outside the space). 22 Click OK. and the system connects them. under Mechanical. This workflow is the Revit MEP recommended best practice for systems creation. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.17 Using the method learned previously. 94 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 25 Click OK. highlight the value (WSHP 2-45) and click Ctrl+C to copy it. the air terminals are the children. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems In this exercise. 20 Click Edit Duct System tab ➤ Edit Duct System panel ➤ Equipment Properties. for Mark. In this exercise.

the Network type provides several solutions. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_04_i. and display solution 1. A Generate Layout tab displays.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Design is highlighted. In this case. for Solution Type. the software recognizes the system components and sketches a temporary layout path connecting them. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Add ductwork using the Generate Layout tool 1 In the Project Browser. click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser to display it. 2 Zoom in to space Lounge 223 in the upper left corner.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Lines indicate the proposed duct layout (blue signifies a main duct line and green signifies a branch). which provides various layout tools. 6 Use the Next Solution and Previous Solution arrows to scroll through the available solutions. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 95 . Also. indicating that it’s the active view. click Training Files. select Network. and then click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name. 3 If the System Browser isn’t displayed. each with branches off the main duct at 90-degree angles. the space crossing lines display. 4 In the drawing area. 5 On the Options Bar. When you highlight a space using the cursor.rvt. select the upper left diffuser.HVAC Plan. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 In the Duct Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Main. WARNING Be careful not to drag the main duct too close to the diffusers. For Duct Type. For Maximum Flex Duct Length. If there is not enough room for the software to create the necessary fittings. click Modify. enter 9' 10 1/2".7 On the Options Bar. 9 On the Generate Layout panel. click Settings. 96 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Select Branch. enter 9' 10 1/2".Round. as shown. For Flex Duct Type. Click OK. select Flex Duct Round : Flex . select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. select Rectangular Duct: Mitered Elbows / Tees. For Duct Type. 10 Select a vertical segment of the main duct. For Offset. you’ll get an error in a later step. enter 3'. For Offset. and use the drag control to drag it just to the left of the lighting fixtures.

The sketch lines are converted to ductwork. Remember to always check duct connectivity after modification. or manually modify the duct. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 97 . a transition connecting the elbow is automatically added. Either relocate the system components. For example. The most common cause of these errors is that the duct usually has insufficient space to be created. All fittings required to connect the duct system to system components are automatically added. as is the elbow itself. select a different layout solution. NOTE Errors may occur while attempting to create duct geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.11 Click Finish Layout. or offset elevations are incorrect.

NOTE Notice that the ductwork is not listed in the System Browser. fittings. Modify the legend display 16 Select the color scheme legend. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Duct Legend. and click OK. Typically the disconnect results from not having enough room between the components that make the connection. Notice that the legend includes all possible values for the color scheme. select By View. If the entire network does not highlight. 98 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Graphics. select Duct Color Fill . and click to select it. Press Tab a third time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts. Press Tab a second time to highlight the entire network of connected ducts up to the first piece of connected equipment. NOTE When multiple ducts and fittings are connected. Usually. 15 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. 14 Click to the right of the system to place the legend. and equipment. and then click OK. but not all values are used in this view. This disconnection will be located at the point where the highlighting stops. the branch to which the duct is connected highlights. The ductwork is a physical (not a logical) connection. for Color Scheme. highlight a segment of the main duct. press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. thus it is not part of the system. 17 In the Type Properties dialog.Flow. you can repair the connection by dragging the duct segment end point away from its current connection point and then dragging it back again to reconnect. you check connectivity by moving the cursor over a segment of ductwork so that it highlights and then pressing Tab. a disconnection exists. Using a flow-based color scheme. The first time you press Tab. you can verify connectivity as you create a system. for Values Displayed. and click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. Add a color scheme legend 12 In the drawing area. You can delete ductwork and the system remains.

25 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog. select Duct Color Fill . select the color scheme legend. and press Enter. Edit color scheme 23 In the drawing area. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 99 . and notice that the flow value has updated with the change. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Notice that the color fill for the connected ductwork has updated.The legend now shows only the color scheme values used in this view. select one of the diffusers in the system. for Schemes. Modify flow values 18 In the drawing area. decrease the flow value by 100 CFM. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Mechanical . The outflow for the WSHP is calculated as the sum of the airflows for all downstream air terminals.Velocity. 20 In the drawing area. and click OK. for Flow. and then press Esc to clear the selection. 22 Close the Instance Properties dialog. select the WSHP. and on the Options Bar.Airflow. Use the velocity-based color scheme as a visual reference to confirm that air is flowing through the system ductwork at the appropriate velocity. note the Air Flow value (2125 CFM). 24 Click Modify Duct Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 26 Click OK. 21 Access the instance properties for the WSHP.

click Cancel. If you get an error that there is not enough room to place the required fittings. and then click to select it. Select Only. Select the upper segment of main duct. Under Constraints. highlight a segment of the duct. 100 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . 28 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Repeat the steps necessary to select the entire system and then size it. select Friction. The ductwork and fittings are updated. Click OK.Calculate duct sizes 27 In the drawing area. The flow information graphically represents the properties of duct systems so that you can easily identify problems with the system. for Branch Sizing. Select Restrict Height. and select 16". and enter . press Tab 3 times to highlight the entire system (including the WSHP). select Calculated Size Only. you need to modify the layout: ■ ■ ■ In the warning dialog. 29 In the Duct Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.08 in-wg/100ft. and drag it to the right.

33 Move the cursor over the system components. Creating Ductwork for Secondary Supply Air Systems | 101 . you can target problem areas directly in your design and resolve them.Inspect the system The System Inspector is a tool that lets you place the cursor over each system to inspect it for airflow. 30 Select one of the ducts in the supply air system. and a system must contain ductwork (physical connection). Notice that the ribbon now displays a System Inspector tab. Using this tool. 32 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. and pressure loss) to find deficiencies in the system. 31 Click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. pressure. Use the information that displays (flow. so that you can modify the system design accordingly. The selected system components or duct must be logically and physically connected for you to use the System Inspector to inspect airflow and pressure inside ductwork. static pressure. and pressure loss. Ductwork and system components must be connected to a system (logical connection).

remember that all information is color-coded according to pressure. 36 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. also known as the critical path. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Air_Systems_05_i. Red information and arrows indicate the highest percentage of pressure loss due to friction. click Training Files. you modify existing ductwork and then use the Connect Into tool to connect components to the existing air system. 102 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Manually Creating Ductwork In this exercise.NOTE As you inspect a system. 34 Zoom in to various parts of the system and verify that the flow arrows are correct. You also convert rigid duct into specified lengths of flex duct. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 35 Click Finish.

Manually create main duct line 1 In the Project Browser. and click to specify the end of the main duct. and click Draw Duct.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 . Manually Creating Ductwork | 103 .HVAC Plan . 7 Move the cursor to just below the lowest set of diffusers. 2 Zoom in to space Instruction 115 in the lower left corner. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 5 Press Spacebar to make the new duct match the WSHP duct size and location. 3 Right-click the supply air connector (the connector facing the room’s double doors). 6 Click midway between the 2 top light fixtures to specify the end of the first segment of the main duct. and select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows / Beveled Taps from the Type Selector drop-down.Design is highlighted. 4 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Element panel. and select the WSHP.

Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ Level 1 . Front. Click this corner Resulting view orientation 104 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . and click Draw Duct. Connect the remaining diffusers using the Connect Into tool The Connect Into tool is used to add or connect components to an existing air system. 14 In the Project Browser. 13 Click Place Duct tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. select 9' 10 1/2". for Offset. double-click MEP . 11 On the Options Bar.3D MEP. right-click the connector grip. 15 On the ViewCube. select the top right diffuser. click the corner where the Top. use the connector grip to quickly and accurately locate a connector. 10 Select Rectangular Duct : Mitered Elbows/Taps from the Type Selector drop-down. The software accounts for the difference in height from the diffuser connector to the specified offset height. Create branch duct lines 9 To begin branch duct. and Left sides converge in order to orient the view as shown.8 Press Esc twice to end the command. 12 End the branch by clicking at the intersection of the branch duct and the main duct. NOTE When drawing duct.

the color fill indicates the flow value. 20 Click Modify Air Terminals tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The ductwork is automatically created. 17 Tile the windows so that you can view results in 3D as you add duct in 2D. Also. select the top unconnected supply diffuser. Manually Creating Ductwork | 105 . and is sized appropriately for the neck size of the diffuser. 22 Using the same method. 21 Click the main supply duct to select it as the duct to connect into.16 Zoom in to space Instruction 115. it is considered a closed loop. connect the remaining diffusers to the main duct. Because this branch has 2 end points (the diffuser and the connector into the main duct). 18 Make the floor plan the active view. 19 In the drawing area. in space 115.

25 Press Esc. zoom in to the open end of the main duct. 24 Select the remaining diffusers. A portion of the rigid ductwork is converted to Flex Duct. and select the top left diffuser.Branch ductwork in 2D Convert duct to flex duct 23 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Convert to Flex Duct. You can ignore the warning. 106 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . Branch ductwork in 3D Add an endcap 26 In the plan view. Revit MEP displays a warning that the flex duct that was created exceeds the Maximum Flex Duct setting in the Mechanical Settings dialog.

and click to select it.To ensure that the system has proper flow propagation and accurate system calculations. 33 Click on the main duct below the top set of diffusers as shown. 32 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Split. Manually Creating Ductwork | 107 . 27 Click Home tab ➤ HVAC panel ➤ Duct Fitting. Size ductwork 34 Highlight a section of the main duct (which is now split). 29 Click the endpoint snap of the main duct. press Tab to highlight the entire main duct run. you need to add an endcap to create a closed loop. 28 Select Rectangular Endcap : Standard from the Type Selector drop-down. and then click Modify. 30 Press Esc twice. Endcap in 3D Split and size main duct 31 Maximize the plan view.

This height constraint is used when you place duct in a restricted space. under Constraints. 39 In the Instance Properties dialog. select a segment of the main duct. Verify duct sizing 38 In the drawing area. and then click OK. clear Restrict Height. verify the flow rate for the remaining segments of the main duct.35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. 108 | Chapter 5 Designing Mechanical Air Systems . under Mechanical . 41 Close the file with or without saving it.Airflow. 37 Press Esc to clear the selection. The ductwork is sized to provide appropriate CFM value for the system. verify that the value is the total of the diffusers supplied by that segment of duct. 36 In the Duct Sizing dialog. for Flow. and click OK. and click Modify Ducts tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. such as a plenum. 40 Using the same method.

and a cooling tower located on the roof. Then. Use the System Browser to review the piping systems. Create return and supply piping systems. You begin the piping system design by placing water source heat pumps and a boiler on level 3 of the building model. Add valves to allow the overall piping system to work in 2 modes: cooling and heating. 109 . using modulating valves to divert through the cooling tower during cooling mode. In this lesson. you create a hydronic piping system that is designed to run in a cooling mode and a heating mode. or to bypass the cooling tower during heating mode. Inspect and validate the piping systems and physical connections. Use a color-coded display to verify and adjust pipe sizing.Designing a Mechanical Piping System 6 In this lesson. Automatically and manually lay out piping. This system is modeled to accommodate full system flow through a boiler. you create the systems and piping to logically and physically connect the system components. additional water source heat pumps from level 1. you learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment. including 2 base mounted pumps.

you place mechanical equipment. click Training Files.Level 3 mechanical piping system Adding Mechanical Equipment In this exercise.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_01_i. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. on level 3 of the building model. including 2 water source heat pumps (WSHP) and a condensing boiler. 110 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .

3 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.Adding air side equipment 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 2 Zoom in to the right side of the shorter building wing. 5 Press Spacebar to rotate the component. NOTE Although space tags are not included in this view.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . you can identify a space by placing the cursor over the space component. A tooltip and the status bar (located at the lower left of the window) confirm the space name and number. and click to place it in the shorter wing of the building. indicating that it’s the active view. and select WSHP . in corridor 328.Left Return .Horizontal . 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . as shown.2-6 Tons .Right Discharge : 6 Ton from the Type Selector drop-down.High Efficiency .HVAC Plan . Adding Mechanical Equipment | 111 . 7 On the Options Bar. verify that Wall faces is selected. 4 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel.

click the top edge of the WSHP. 11 Press Enter and then press Esc. and enter 2'. 13 Place another WSHP to the left of the one you just placed. 10 Select the WSHP. 12 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment.) 112 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click the dimension. (Use the alignment sketch graphics to position the second WSHP the same distance from the corridor wall as the first. and in the Type Selector. and click to place the dimension. as shown. 9 Click Place Dimensions tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. verify that the WSHP is still selected.8 Click the corridor wall face. as shown.

as shown. for Offset. enter 12 GPM. and click to place it in the mechanical room. 17 Press Esc to clear the selection. Add water side equipment 18 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. and click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel. enter 9'. 20 Press Spacebar 3 times to rotate the component. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Constraints. Adding Mechanical Equipment | 113 . Under Mechanical. above and to the left of the Base Mounted Pump. select the 2 WSHPs.14 Click Modify. Modify WSHP parameters 15 While pressing Ctrl. for Water Flow. and select Condensing Boiler : 500 MBH from the Type Selector drop-down. Click OK.

Creating a Piping System In this exercise. and use the System Browser to review and confirm the systems. Create pipes to physically connect the system components. 22 Close the file with or without saving it.21 Click Modify. Create the logical connection between the system components. including flow and pressure. you create the return and supply piping systems. The recommended workflow to create piping systems is to: ■ ■ ■ Place mechanical equipment and other system components. 114 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses. A system is the logical connection between system components such as water source heat pumps (WSHPs) and a boiler.

2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . physical connections (pipes) are not required for systems creation. 4 Click the titlebar for the System Browser window. 5 In the System Browser.Mech 330). You can create pipes to connect system components. Creating a Piping System | 115 . Explore the System Browser 1 In the Project Browser. Unlike logical connections (systems). This display option allows you to simplify the browser view by showing only the Piping discipline. analyses cannot be performed. click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click View ➤ Piping. and drag the window down so it displays along the bottom of the screen. where it is easier to review the information. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . and expand the Default Hydronic Supply 1 and the Default Hydronic Return 1 systems to view the mechanical equipment placed in the building. 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. right-click the Systems column heading. indicating that it’s the active view.Design is highlighted.HVAC Plan .rvt.IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system. 6 Expand the Unassigned folder. Chilled water supply system: 2 WSHPs and a cooling tower Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . but without a corresponding system.

11 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. Assigning a system component to an existing system. As you assign equipment to systems. A red dashed line connects the 2 WSHPs in the drawing. leaving a large number of components in a default system can hinder performance and prevent accurate calculations for the systems where they should have been assigned. They remain in the Default systems category until you assign them to a system. all system components are organized in a folder tree hierarchy according to the system that you assigned to them. enter CHWR to represent Chilled Water Return. After you placed the WSHPs and boiler. Equipment that remains in a default system is included in heating and cooling loads calculations. Therefore. It does not indicate a pipe layout path. TIP If you clicked outside of the drawing area. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. and the Edit System tool is not active. Create the hydronic return piping system 7 In the drawing area. 9 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. Revit MEP immediately assigned them to the Default Hydronic Return and Default Hydronic Supply systems category located in the Unassigned folder. You assign a system component to a system either by: ■ ■ Creating a logical connection (system) between the system components. 116 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select one of the WSHPs that you added to the system to activate this tool and the other options on the Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. 12 In the drawing area. Notice that on the Options Bar.In the System Browser. select the 2 WSHPs. This display indicates that the system is selected. the System Equipment is Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. select the boiler. the assigned equipment moves from the Unassigned folder to the respective assigned system folder. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Return. 10 On the Options Bar. IMPORTANT All mechanical equipment in the project should be assigned to a system other than a default system. for System Name. while pressing Ctrl.

20 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. You have created the hydronic return system. Create the hydronic supply piping system 14 Select one of the WSHPs that you placed previously.) 16 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. 21 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 19 In the Project Browser. 18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.Design. and select the second WSHP to add it to the supply system. enter CHWS to represent Chilled Water Supply. 15 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Hydronic Supply. (You can click the Piping Systems tab to access the Return System properties. Notice that the Hydronic Return option does not display because the selected component already has a hydronic return system assigned to it.HVAC Plan . double-click Roof . Creating a Piping System | 117 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. and select the cooling tower. 17 On the Options Bar.13 Click Finish Editing System. under Design ➤ HVAC . for System Name.

Notice that the Options Bar indicates 3 for the Number of Elements. 28 Using the same method. indicating the logical connection. right-click the Hydronic Supply system category. Confirm and validate the systems 27 In the System Browser. You can now view the systems hierarchy: CHWR and CHWS logically connect the boiler (parent) with the WSHPs (children). and bypasses the cooling tower.22 In the Select Connector dialog. 24 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. In heating mode. 23 Close the roof plan view. expand the Hydronic Return system category. The CHWS system contains the 2 WSHPs and the cooling tower. 26 Click Finish Editing System. and click OK. 118 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . IMPORTANT The new system named CHWS is now listed in the System Browser under Hydronic Supply ➤ Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. The hydronic supply system highlights in red. In cooling mode. 25 Select the boiler. The boiler is the only equipment that has connectors with compatible system types (hydronic supply and hydronic return). and click Select. the water returns through the boiler into the cooling tower by way of the WSHPs. 29 Right-click CHWS. select Connector 1 : Undefined : Round : 4'' : Cooling Water Supply In. You select the boiler as equipment for supply to the WSHPs. the boiler supplies heated water to the system. and click Expand All. the cooling tower provides cooled water to the system.

select Fluid Type and Fluid Temperature. 33 In the Instance Properties dialog. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout In this exercise. and click OK. 32 In the System Browser. under Mechanical. expand Piping. you create the physical connections in the pipe system automatically using the Generate Layout tool. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 119 . 30 Right-click the Systems column heading. You also manually modify the layout path as required. and click Properties. for Water Flow. enter 18 GPM. and click Column Settings. The CHWS Flow value is updated in the System Browser.In the System Browser. and click OK. 34 Close the file with or without saving it. You can select the columns that you want to display in the System Browser. right-click the Flow value for one of the WSHPs in the CHWS system. including the flow rate and size of the component. 31 In the Column Settings dialog. you can view several parameters.

IMPORTANT If you select system components to create a pipe layout.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_03_i.Mech 330). 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 2 Beginning outside the building at the upper left corner. Notice that all components within the Level 3 . Select components with the Filter tool 1 In the Project Browser.HVAC Plan . and the selected system components are already connected to more than one system (because they have multiple system connectors). indicating that it’s the active view. you are selecting all components within the view range of the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . click Training Files.HVAC plan view range are highlighted. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The layout path solutions display with the main in blue and the branch in green. and then click OK to create a layout for the currently selected system. then the Select a System dialog displays. and the 2 base mounted pumps are selected (and display in red). When you draw a box to select components. select CHWR. and click OK. The level 3 water source heat pumps (WSHPs). TIP Instead of selecting all components and filtering. 10 Click OK. 5 In the Filter dialog. drag the cursor to the lower right corner to draw a selection box around the floor plan. 9 In the Select a System dialog. 4 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.rvt. select Mechanical Equipment. 3 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building (Space . A system preview displays in red. Revit MEP provides several solutions from which to choose. the boiler. You select a system in the dialog to view it in the drawing. You use an alternate method of selecting the system in the next steps. you can place the cursor over a system component. Create the Level 3 return pipe layout 7 Select a WSHP.Design is highlighted. 8 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and click to select it. press Tab to highlight the system.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 120 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . click Check None.

It does not reference the architecture. verify that the Offset value for the Main and for the Branch is 10' 0''. or architectural components. select Perimeter. ■ ■ Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 121 . IMPORTANT The branch offset lets you automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. You can modify this value for the main and branch elevations. 15 On the Options Bar: ■ For Solution Type. 13 Click Cancel. For Inset. The perimeter solution creates a layout that runs parallel (along a perimeter) to the connectors of the selected system components. enter 1' 6''.11 On the Options Bar. 12 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. you can change the pipe type and the vertical offset at which the piping will automatically be created. This functionality is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. structural beams. 14 On the Generate Layout tab. Click (Next Solution) until solution 4 of 5 is selected. click Settings. duct. verify that Solutions is selected. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog.

the Status Bar displays the components being highlighted: ■ ■ ■ Branch in a pipe network. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. With each Tab. 17 Optionally. and press Tab 3 times. Branch in a pipe network including the branch objects. select the pipe connecting the WSHP on the right to the boiler. 19 In the drawing area.16 Click Finish Layout. 122 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment. to display the path with thinner lines. 18 Place the cursor over the piping. View the Status Bar to verify the branch option currently displayed. you modified the flow value for the WSHPs. Verify the flow In a previous exercise. and the flow for the other is 12. The piping is automatically created along with the appropriate connectors and fittings so that all of the piping segments are connected to equipment. the flow for one WSHP is 18.

and click OK. notice that the Water Flow is 30 GPM. 22 Select the boiler. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 123 . verify that the value for Flow is 30 GPM. and click OK. and access its instance properties. 24 Press Esc. This value indicates the total of the flow for the 2 WSHPs (18 GPM + 12 GPM).The flow through this pipe should equal the flow of both WSHPs. 20 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Mechanical. Add the Level 1 WSHPs to the return system 25 Select the WSHP on the left. 23 Under Mechanical. The flow from the 2 WSHPs travels into the boiler. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Design. Next. and zoom to fit the drawing in the view. Physically connect the multi-level WSHPs Previously. you logically added Level 1 WSHPs to the CHWR System. double-click Level 1 . and verify that CHWR is selected from the System Selector drop-down. 28 In the Project Browser. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . 32 Click Finish Editing System. 124 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Logically. you physically close the CHWR loop.HVAC Plan . 33 Zoom in to the piping that comes from the floor below. 30 Draw a selection window to select the 6 WSHPs. which propagates flow throughout the system. 31 Close the Level 1 plan view. click Edit System. the Level 1 WSHPs are connected to the chilled water return system (CHWR). the Number of Elements is now 8. 27 On the System Tools panel. On the Options Bar.Design ➤ Floor Plans. 29 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System.26 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel.

note that the value for Flow is 95 GPM. Verify the flow from the lower level 36 With the new pipe selected. 35 Using the drag control. extend the pipe to the left until it connects to the center line of the existing pipe at the horizontal and nearest snap. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 125 . as shown. 38 Using the same method. 37 In the Instance Properties dialog. review the properties for the boiler to verify that the Water Flow value is 125 GPM. and then close the Instance Properties dialog.34 Select the bottom piece of horizontal pipe. so the total flow of 125 GPM indicates that the flow has propagated correctly. The Level 3 WSHPs generate a flow of 30 GPM. The fittings are automatically created to connect to the return piping coming from below. under Mechanical. Manually modify piping in layout mode 39 In the drawing area. and then click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and the flow coming from Level 1 is 95 GPM. the 6 WSHPs from Level 1 have already been added to the chilled water supply system (CHWS). select a WSHP. NOTE For the purposes of this tutorial. and click Cancel. access its instance properties.

select CHWS.40 In the Select a System dialog. 41 Click OK. select Perimeter 1 of 5. 42 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Solution Type. In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 45 Click the supply pipe from the cooling tower above. enter 1' 6''. enter 0''/12''. 44 Click the boiler to remove it from the layout path solution. ■ ■ 43 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Remove. For Slope. For Inset. enter 9' 6'' for both the Main Offset and the Branch Offset. and then click OK. The inset is the distance from the pipe to the connection on the selected system component. 126 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . Click Settings.

select the vertical sketch line just above the one you already selected. you connect the boiler to parallel-connected base mounted pumps. Adding Pipe Using Auto Layout | 127 . and drag it to the left (just to the right of the double door in the underlay). 46 Click Modify. select the right vertical green sketch line in the path. 47 In the drawing area.) 49 Select the 4-way arrow control. In a later exercise.The boiler and cooling tower are no longer included in the layout path. (Both sections are at the same elevation. as shown. 48 While pressing Ctrl. as shown.

NOTE Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.50 Using the same method. select a different layout solution. Either relocate the system components. Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel to the system. 51 Click Finish Layout. or manually modify the pipe. To create the piping system. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout In this exercise. 128 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 52 Close the file with or without saving it. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ Connect the boiler to the return piping. Add piping to close the supply loop. and drag it to the right to align it with the sketch lines you just moved. Connect the cooling tower into the supply system to maintain the closed loop. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. select the short vertical path line connecting the right WSHP (in the same location as the short segment of pipe). you manually lay out piping to create a closed loop system. You tile a plan view and a 3D view to simultaneously create the pipe (physical) connections and validate the pipe geometry. or offset elevations are incorrect.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.NOTE Default color filters for the Hydronic Supply and Hydronic Return have already been specified for this project in the Visibility Graphic Overrides dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.rvt. 2 Under Design ➤ HVAC . double-click 3D HVAC Building. In the left pane of the Open dialog.HVAC Plan . verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser. you will notice that the supply pipes are dark purple. and the return pipes are magenta.Design ➤ 3D Views. Sometimes (such as during vertical alignment) it’s easier to select components in 3D.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 129 . 4 Adjust the view in both windows (use the ViewCube and Zoom tools) to see the connections on the boiler. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_04_i. as shown. You may find it helpful to view the system in both plan and 3D during design and validation. click Training Files. As you work in the training file.

Modify return piping to accommodate supply piping 5 In the 3D view. 130 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . as shown. select the section of piping. draw a selection window around the elbow fitting and the small piece of pipe connecting into the boiler return connector. 7 In the plan view. 6 Press Delete.

■ Move the cursor up 4''. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 131 . and press Esc to clear the selection. select the boiler.8 Move the piping: ■ ■ Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. ■ Click to move the piping. 10 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. 9 In the 3D view. Click to specify the reference point.

13 In the plan view. and the lower one is secondary. 132 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . The top base mounted pump in the plan view is primary. Plan view of return piping connection to the boiler Connect the primary base mounted pump to the boiler Two base mounted pumps are included in the system. and the boiler is connected to the return piping. and click OK. select the return pipe riser. and click Draw Pipe. Using the Connect Into tool ensures that if the connection is successful. 14 Right-click the grip that represents the supply connector (top). click Connector 2 : Hydronic Return : Round : 2'' : Cold Water In. select the boiler. 12 In the 3D view.You use this tool on components with connectors to automatically create piping between the component and the existing system. The connections are automatically created. An automatic flow valve will be used to direct the flow from the boiler to the 2 pumps. The tool also automatically creates the appropriate fittings. 11 In the Select Connector dialog. flow will propagate through the connecting pipe and be assigned to the appropriate system based on the connector to which it is connected.

■ Move the cursor down. enter 2'. 16 Press Spacebar to acquire offset and pipe diameter values from the connector. You can input dimensions as you draw pipe to ensure specific length segments. for Offset.In a plan view. the Select Connector dialog displays prompting you to select the return or the supply connector. and press Enter. and select Pipe Types: Standard from the Type Selector drop-down.7''. if a component has 2 connectors that are not connected to piping. 15 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. enter 1' . and click just before the midway point on the primary base mounted pump. 17 Draw the piping: ■ Move the cursor to the right. Add another 2' section of pipe to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 133 . and you select 1 connector. ■ ■ On the Options Bar.

select Connector 2 : Undefined: Round: 3''. 19 In the plan view. and select it. As you place piping runs that are close together. as shown. 18 Press Esc twice. 20 Click Modify Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.NOTE The Automatically Connect option attempts to connect piping that is positioned within a specified range. and the appropriate fittings are created. select the primary base mounted pump. 134 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click OK. 22 Select the last segment of pipe you drew. Upgrade a fitting 23 Zoom in to the elbow fitting. it may be helpful to switch Automatically Connect off to avoid unintended piping connections. Notice in the 3D view that the specified offset dropped the horizontal run down. 21 In the Select Connector dialog. The pipe is automatically connected to the base mounted pump.

Connect the secondary base mounted pump 25 Select the tee fitting. and click to draw the pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 29 If necessary. 28 Press Esc. click to connect to the pump. 27 Move the cursor to the right. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 135 . zoom out in the 3D view to see the new connections.24 Click the bottom plus symbol to upgrade the fitting from an elbow to a tee. right-click the bottom connector. NOTE To downgrade from a tee fitting to an elbow. you select the tee fitting. and click the minus symbol. 26 Move the cursor down until the Status Bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection of the base mounted pump. and when the connector point displays.

Connect the base mounted pumps in parallel 30 In the plan view. 33 Press Esc. 32 Move the cursor down until it joins the connector point on the secondary base mounted pump. and click Draw Pipe. select the primary base mounted pump. right-click the discharge connector. for Offset. 136 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . and click to create the pipe. enter 4'. 31 On the Options Bar.

as shown. zoom in to the elbow fitting on the left (secondary) base mounted pump. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 137 .Notice that you do not have to draw the 2 vertical pipes to connect to the pumps. upgrade the fitting to a tee connector. 35 Using the method learned previously. these pipe connections were created automatically. 3D view of parallel-connected base mounted pumps Add pipe to create a closed loop system 34 In the 3D view.

and press Enter. and click Draw Pipe. ■ Move the cursor down. Move the cursor down until the status bar indicates that the alignment is at the intersection and vertical with the pipe shown.36 Draw pipe to connect the base mounted pipes to the return: ■ In the plan view. type 1'. for Offset. select the tee connector in the secondary base mounted pump. ■ ■ On the Options Bar. and click to create the pipe. 138 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . right-click the bottom control on the tee. enter 9' 6''.

right-click. and click Element Properties. Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 139 .37 Click Modify. select the pipe from the secondary base mounted pump to the supply pipe. you validate the flow through the system. You now have a closed loop system. Next. Validate flow propagation through the supply system 38 In the plan view.

Connect the cooling tower Next. view the properties for the secondary pump. The flow is being propagated through the piping. 45 In the Instance Properties dialog. 48 In the plan view. When you create the pumps in parallel. 40 Click Cancel. Flow is not currently passing through the cooling tower because it is not yet connected to the hydronic piping system. you can specify the Flow Factors for the 2 pumps as any combination that adds up to 100%. select the following pipes: ■ Supply pipe. under Mechanical. 46 Press Esc. you physically connect the cooling tower piping to propagate flow. for Cooling Water Flow. the value is 0 GPM. The Flow Factor for the primary pump is set to 50% also. 41 Using the same method. The cooling tower propagates flow through the inlet and outlet connectors.50 or 50% of the Flow. 47 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Extend drop-down ➤ Trim/Extend Multiple Elements. as shown. and click OK.39 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that the Flow Factor is a parameter that is . 42 Click OK. 44 In the 3D view. 140 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . notice that under Mechanical. under Mechanical. right-click. select the cooling tower. In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Element Properties. which is rounded up to 63 GPM (1/2 of 125 GPM). 43 Press Esc. ■ Upper pipe going to the cooling tower (inlet). notice that Flow is 125 GPM.

Both pipes for the cooling tower are automatically connected to the piping system.■ Lower pipe (outlet). Adding Pipe Using Manual Layout | 141 . NOTE Piping colors update based on specified filters. 49 Press Esc.

52 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Adding Valves In this exercise. click Training Files. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_05_i. the water bypasses the cooling tower. You also add shut-off valves to control the flow to and from the cooling tower.50 In the 3D View. and close the dialog. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and is heated by the boiler.rvt. You add a bypass valve to stop the flow and direct it to the cooling tower (cooling mode). 142 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . select the cooling tower. you add valves to model the piping for 2 modes: cooling mode and heating mode. When the valve is open. and open the Instance Properties dialog to validate that the flow is propagating correctly through the cooling tower. 51 Verify that the value for Cooling Water Flow is 125 GPM.

Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . indicating that it’s the active view. 3 Click the section of pipe between the supply in and supply out pipes to the cooling tower. 4 On the Options Bar.Place a bypass valve to control flow to the cooling tower 1 In the Project Browser.Design is highlighted. 8 Press Esc twice. 7 Click the center of the pipe to place the valve. Adding Valves | 143 . as shown.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down.HVAC Plan . verify that the Diameter value is 3''. Rotate the valve 9 Select the valve. 2 Zoom in to the shorter wing of the building. 6 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Element panel. and click the top Rotate control to rotate the valve to a horizontal position. 5 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. and select Ball Valve . The bypass valve is closed by default. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . NOTE Be careful to select a bypass valve in this step.

Place shut-off valves 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. place another Ball Valve .2-6 Inch : 4'' from the Type Selector drop-down. parallel to the previously placed valve. 15 Click Place Pipe Accessory tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 144 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .2-6 Inch Bypass : 4'' valve on the return pipe for the cooling tower.10 Press Esc. 12 Select Ball Valve . 13 Click to place the valve at the midpoint of the supply pipe to the cooling tower. 14 Using the same method.

Rotate both valves 16 Click the top Rotate control to the left of each valve to rotate the valve as shown. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. you want to shut off the flow of water into the cooling tower. In heating mode. You bypass the cooling tower with hot water coming from the boiler. under Mechanical. For the top horizontal pipe (flow to the cooling tower). validate that the Flow value is 0 GPM. and select Ball Valve . validate the following flow values: ■ ■ ■ For the pipe below the bypass valve. Add valves to facilitate a dual mode system 17 Select the small piece of pipe above the bypass valve.2-6 Inch : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. For the bottom horizontal pipe (flow from the cooling tower). and click Element Properties. Modify valves to bypass the cooling tower Currently the system is designed to run in cooling mode. validate that the Flow is 125 GPM. You add valves to the cooling tower to enable the system to alternately run in heating mode. and select Ball Valve . right-click.) 21 Select the 2 regular valves (in open position). 19 Using the same method. and click OK. 20 Select the bypass valve.2-6 Inch Bypass : 3'' from the Type Selector drop-down. (This valve allows the water to flow through it. Adding Valves | 145 . verify that Flow is 0 GPM. 18 In the Instance Properties dialog.

validate the following: ■ ■ ■ The flow going into the cooling tower is 0 GPM. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .Design is highlighted. The color-coded display allows you to quickly see differing sizes and flow of piping. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_06_i. The flow traveling through the bypass section of pipe is 125 GPM.rvt. You then use a combination of friction and velocity to size the pipes appropriately. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.HVAC Plan . you use the pipe color scheme legend as a color-coded reference to view the flow within the pipes and the sizing. 146 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . you verify automatically calculated pipe size and flow parameters. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The flow coming out of the cooling tower is 0 GPM. Initially. click Training Files. 3 Click to place the color scheme legend in the area to the right of the piping system.22 Using the method you just learned.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 3 . 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Color Schemes panel ➤ Pipe Legend. as shown. Display the pipe color scheme legend 1 In the Project Browser. Sizing Pipe In this exercise. 23 Close the file with or without saving it.

This display will help you size the pipe using friction and velocity sizing methods.Size. Display the color fill based on pipe size 6 Select the Color Scheme Legend. click Pipe Color Fill . and click Modify Pipe Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. 5 Compare the legend to the color coding in the drawing to verify that the flow values are as expected. and click OK. 7 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog.Flow.4 In the Choose Color Scheme dialog. for Schemes. This option displays the pipes in colors based on flow values. Sizing Pipe | 147 . 8 Press Esc to clear the selection. select Pipe Color Fill . and click OK.

and click to select the branch. Click OK. 12 In the Pipe Sizing dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Sizing Method.Size the pipe using friction and velocity methods 9 Zoom in to the section of pipe connecting the boiler to the parallel base mounted pumps. enter 5 FPS. 11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ Duct/Pipe Sizing. Select And. for Branch Sizing. and for Velocity. The piping increases in diameter based on the friction and velocity values specified. 148 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . 13 Press Esc.25 FT/100ft. and enter 2. select Friction. 10 Move the cursor over the pipe between the primary and secondary base mounted pumps. IMPORTANT The Pipe Sizing dialog displays the sizing settings that were last used. It does not report the sizing settings of the selected pipe segment or pipe run. press Tab 3 times (so that the status bar indicates that you’ve highlighted a branch in a pipe network up to a piece of equipment). select Larger of Connector and Calculated. Under Constraints.

rvt. The most common cause of these errors is that there is insufficient space to create the pipe. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. pressure. The System Inspector lets you inspect each piping system for flow. Either relocate the system components. you use the System Inspector to inspect the Level 3 hydronic piping system. In the left pane of the Open dialog. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . or offset elevations are incorrect. and double-click 3D HVAC Building. and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_07_i. Remember to always check pipe connectivity after modification. click Training Files. 14 Close the file with or without saving it. and pressure loss by placing the cursor over a pipe or mechanical equipment that you assigned to the system. Inspecting the System | 149 . 2 Select the section of the return piping (magenta) between the 2 water source heat pumps on the upper level. you can easily detect problem areas in your design and resolve them immediately. Inspecting the System In this exercise. select a different layout solution. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views. Using the System Inspector. Inspect the system 1 In the Project Browser.IMPORTANT Errors may occur while you are attempting to create pipe geometry as a result of converting a layout or during sizing.

and pressure information including pressure loss. The pipe and the system components must be connected to a system (logical connection) and a system must contain pipe (physical connection). Arrows display on the pipe indicating the flow direction for both the main and the branches in the pipe system. An inspection flag reports the section number. 150 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System . flow. the selected system components and pipe must be logically and physically connected. The critical flow (indicated by red arrows) is in the main line going to the boiler. 5 Place the cursor over the same section of return piping. NOTE Zoom in to the piping to see the arrows clearly. 4 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Inspect. NOTE To use the System Inspector to inspect flow and pressure inside pipe.3 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Analysis panel ➤ System Inspector. as required. This information helps you modify the system design.

and the Pressure Loss is 1. 11 Close the file with or without saving it.67 psi. the Static Pressure is 7. you need to validate them. and to size pipe.89 psi. In this exercise. for Fluid Temperature.65 psi and the Pressure Loss is 1. you use the Check Pipe Systems tool to quickly check these connections for all systems throughout your project. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open. 7 Click System Inspector tab ➤ System Inspector panel ➤ Properties. as shown. Checking Piping Systems | 151 . 10 Click Finish. targeting those systems that need attention.88 psi. 9 Using the same method. inspect Section 6 again. and click OK. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the Flow is 80 GPM. Because both the logical (system) and physical (pipe) connections play a vital role in the overall systems design. Checking Piping Systems Revit MEP uses both the pipe geometry and the system to perform calculations such as flow and pressure. select 90° F. and notice that the Static Pressure is 7.Modify fluid temperature 6 Place the cursor over the section of pipe (Section 6) between the 2 WSHPs on the lower level.

double-click Level 1 . You will check the mechanical piping components to learn how to use the System Browser to confirm specified and default system assignments. In the System Browser. After you have assigned all components to systems. 8 Expand Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH. the water source heat pump is listed in the assigned system and assigned to the Default Hydronic Sanitary system in the Unassigned folder. 5 Verify that Systems and Piping are selected.rvt. 7 In the System Browser. As you learned when placing components. click Training Files. Note that a system component may be listed in both its assigned system and in the Unassigned folder. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Pipe Systems. A dialog lets you click Show multiple times for different views. under which the mechanical equipment that was assigned to the system is listed. Revit MEP creates a default system and assigns them to it in order to perform system calculations. Use the System Browser to confirm piping system assignments 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and for pipe sizing. and click View. and double-click Level 3 . These warnings can refer to both physical connection issues (such as a disconnected or problematic pipe) or logical connection issues (such as an improperly assigned system). and open Imperial\02_Mechanical Systems\RME_Mech_Piping_08_i. The default system is placed in the Unassigned folder until you select the system components and create a system for them. Perform a systems check 1 In the Project Browser. and you have not yet assigned the component to the other systems.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe that is associated with a default system (located in the Unassigned folder) is not checked. NOTE The check systems warnings contain a system type and a description. but the same component has a sanitary system connector that you have not assigned to a system. Warnings display. the pipe is associated with that system. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Revit MEP moves them from the Unassigned folder to their assigned systems folder. 4 In the System Browser. After you assign components to a system. right-click the Systems titlebar. thus assigning the components to a system.HVAC Plan .HVAC Plan . all system components must be assigned to a system after they are placed. The dashed red lines represent the logical connection. and click Show to view all of the system components. IMPORTANT The most common check systems warning is: default system is not empty. 9 Right-click CHWS. Revit MEP checks both the logical (system) and the physical (pipe) connections of each piping system throughout the project. Notice that these warnings indicate that the Default systems are not empty. notice the CHWS (Chilled Water Supply System) is listed. For example. If you place components without assigning them to a system.Design ➤ Floor Plans. Pipe geometry is used for system flow and pressure calculations. you assigned a water source heat pump to a supply hydronic system.Design. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . Remember that after you create pipe to physically connect a system.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. 152 | Chapter 6 Designing a Mechanical Piping System .Design. 6 In the Project Browser. This occurs when the assigned system component can be connected to multiple systems (it contains different system connectors). Note that only physical connections associated with an assigned system are checked. expand the Hydronic Supply folder and notice that the Condensing Boiler: 500 MBH is listed. the Unassigned folder will be empty and Check Pipe Systems will no longer display not empty warnings.

TIP If you have multiple views open. You have confirmed and validated both unassigned and assigned system components and their systems. Checking Piping Systems | 153 .Design floor plan.HVAC Plan . click Close. otherwise. 14 Using the methods that you learned. 10 Using the same methods. and select Level 3 . 13 Right-click CHWR. and confirm unassigned system components. confirm the system and the system assignments for the Hydronic Supply system. and click Expand All. 11 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Switch Windows drop-down. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. The return system that you created (CHWR) is listed along with the boiler and the water source heat pumps (WSHPs) that you assigned to this system. you can click Show in the Show Element(s) In View dialog to switch between views. expand the Unassigned folder. and click Select to confirm this system and the assigned system components. 12 In the System Browser. right-click Hydronic Return.

154 .

155 .Creating an Electrical System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design an electrical system.

156 .

Color fill plan with required lighting levels ■ Create a space lighting analysis schedule 157 . You learn to: ■ ■ ■ Specify electrical settings. Define required lighting.Planning an Electrical System 7 In this lesson. you complete the planning tasks associated with creating an electrical system. Assign space color fills according to required lighting levels.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. ■ ■ For Factor. ■ Click New Correction Factor.04. distribution systems. enter THHN. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You also add a wiring type. In this exercise you review electrical settings.rvt. wiring. enter 1.Specifying Electrical Settings Electrical settings determine the voltages. For Material. 2 In the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. select 75. Revit MEP checks to ensure that components are compatible with the specified voltages and distribution systems. 158 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . For Temperature. Add a wiring type 3 In the left pane. click Training Files. Click OK. Select Correction Factor. and demand factors that are applied in the design. select 90. and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_01_i. click (Open). 4 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. expand Wiring . ■ ■ For Material. select Copper.Wire Sizes. select Copper. For Temperature Rating. select Wiring Types. As you place components and create circuits. speeding up the design phase. Add a correction factor 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Insulation, select THHN. For Max Size, enter 2000. For Neutral Multiplier, enter 1.0. Select Neutral Required. For Neutral Size, select Hot Conductor Size. For Conduit Type, select Steel.

Add a voltage definition 5 In the left pane, select Voltage Definitions. The Voltage Definitions table is used to specify a range of voltages that are used with your voltage definitions. By specifying a range, you allow circuits to be created between components with rated voltages that do not precisely match the voltage definition value. 6 Click Add and in the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 240. For Value, enter 240. For Minimum, enter 220. For Maximum, enter 250.

Add a distribution system 7 In the left pane, select Distribution Systems. Note the 3 distribution systems listed. 8 Click Add and in the Electrical settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter 120/240. For Phase, select Single. For Wires, select 3. For L-L Voltage, select 240. For L-G Voltage, select 120.

Specify demand factors 9 In the left pane, select Demand Factors. You can specify demand factors that let you adjust the rating of the main service for the building. 10 In the Electrical Settings dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Load Classification, select Power. Under More Than, select 10000 VA. Click Split. Select 20000 VA and for Demand Factor, enter 50. Click OK.

11 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a schedule to define required lighting levels. Then you assign lighting levels to spaces.

Specifying Electrical Settings | 159

Defining Required Lighting
In this exercise, you specify the lighting levels that are required for the different spaces within the building, such as offices, restrooms, and conference rooms. You begin by adding a new Project Parameter (Required Lighting Level), then you create a Key Schedule that links your new parameter to the various types of spaces in your project. Key schedules provide an efficient way to create an instance parameter that can be used to map specific parameter values to particular key styles. In this case the key style is the type of space and, because the key is linked to your new project parameter, its value becomes the Required Lighting Level. Later in the tutorial, you will use the new parameter again to compare the value for Required Lighting Level against the actual illumination provided by fixtures that you place in the plan. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_02_i.rvt.

Add a project parameter for lighting 1 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. 2 In the Project Parameters dialog, click Add. 3 In the Parameter Properties dialog, under Parameter Data:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Required Lighting Level. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type of Parameter, select Illuminance. For Group Parameter Under, select Electrical - Lighting. Under Categories, select Spaces. Verify that Instance is selected. Click OK twice. The Required Lighting Level project parameter has been added and will appear as an instance parameter for all spaces, under the Electrical - Lighting group in the space element properties.

Verify the new parameter 4 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 5 In the drawing area, zoom in on the lower left corner and use the crosshair as a guide to select Space 218.

6 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.

160 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

7 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Electrical - Lighting, note the Required Lighting Level parameter. Click OK. Create a schedule for required lighting levels 8 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 9 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Requirements. Select Schedule Keys, and for Key Name, enter Lighting Levels. Click OK.

10 On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog, under Available Fields, double-click Required Lighting Level, and click OK. The schedule displays and includes a title and column headings. 11 Double-click the column boundary to the right of each column to adjust the column to fit the text.

Add space lighting requirements to the schedule table 12 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New. 13 In the Key Name column of the first row, enter Open Office. 14 In the first row of the Required Lighting Level column, enter 45. 15 Adjust the column boundaries as needed.

16 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ New to add 13 more rows. 17 Complete the table by entering the following:

The fc value is automatically applied as the parameter is based upon illuminance parameter type, which is mapped to project units. Notice that as you enter the data, the rows are automatically sorted by Key Name. You can change the sort/grouping to sort by Required Lighting Level.

Defining Required Lighting | 161

Change the sort order of the schedule 18 Right-click in the schedule and click View Properties. 19 In the Instance Properties dialog, for Sorting/Grouping, click Edit. 20 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■

For Sort By, select Required Lighting Level. Select Blank Line.

21 Click OK twice. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Required Lighting Level.

22 Using the same method, change the sort order back to the default setting. The entries in the schedule are sorted by Key Name. Apply a lighting level to spaces 23 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 - Lighting Plan. 24 Zoom to Space 218 and select the space element.

25 Click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that under Electrical-Lighting, that Required Lighting Level is blank. 26 In the Instance Properties dialog, under Identity Data, for Lighting Levels, select Instruction-Standard. Notice that the Required Lighting Level now has a value of 50 fc and the field is dimmed, since the Lighting Level is set to use the value assigned to the Instruction-Standard key value. The

162 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

only way to change the value is to either select a different Lighting Level key, select None for Lighting Level and type a specific value, or edit the Required Lighting Level key schedule for the selected key. Since Required Lighting Level is an instance parameter, the value input applies only to the selected space. 27 Click OK. You can apply a key schedule to multiple spaces at the same time by selecting the spaces and specifying the lighting levels in the Electrical properties dialog.

28 Close the file with or without saving it. Next you create a color fill scheme for space lighting.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules
Revit MEP lets you add color fills to spaces based on specific space parameters. Space color fill plans and schedules can be helpful as design tools and as design communications documents. In this exercise, you will create a space color fill plan using the lighting levels that you specified in the previous exercise. Space color fills can be used with any parameter that exists for the space components. Later in this exercise, you create a space lighting analysis schedule to aid in the layout of your lighting design. The schedule includes a calculated lighting delta value, which is the difference between the required and the calculated illuminance values. Training File
■ ■

On the Quick Access toolbar, click

(Open).

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\RME_Elec_Planning_03_i.rvt.

Create a color fill legend scheme 1 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel drop-down ➤ Color Schemes. 2 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Schemes, for Category, select Spaces. Under Schemes, click (Duplicate).

3 In the New Color Scheme dialog, for Name, enter Required Lighting and click OK. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■

Under Scheme Definition, for Title, enter Required Lighting Levels. For Color, select Required Lighting Level, and click OK to dismiss the alert message.

5 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog:

Under Scheme Definition, verify the By Range is selected.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 163

Select the scheme for At Least 20.00 fc, and click (Add Value). This command adds a new value based on the split value of the unit you are adding the new value after. For example, if you select the value for 20 fc and click Add, then the new value will be 40 fc. If you select the value for 20 fc again and click Add, then the new value will be 30 fc or half of the difference between the two values you are adding.

With the scheme for At Least 20. 00 fc still selected, click

(Add Value) again.

Select the scheme for At Least 40.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

■ ■ ■

Select the scheme for 30.00 fc, and click

(Add Value).

Select the scheme for 50.00 fc, enter 75.00, and press ENTER. Select the scheme for 40.00 fc, enter 50.00, and press ENTER.

Click OK.

Add a legend and apply the color scheme 6 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Lighting - Design ➤ Floor Plans, and double-click Level 2 - Lighting CF. 7 Click Architect tab ➤ Room & Area panel ➤ Legend. 8 In the drawing area, click to place the legend to the right of the drawing. 9 In the Choose Space Type and Color Scheme dialog:
■ ■ ■

For Space Type, select Spaces. For Color Scheme, select Required Lighting. Click OK.

The color fill plan displays the required illuminance levels based on the key values previously created.

164 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System

Create a space lighting analysis schedule 10 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Schedules drop-down ➤ Schedule/Quantities. 11 In the New Schedule dialog:
■ ■

For Category, select Spaces. For Name, enter Space Lighting Analysis and click OK.

12 In the Schedule Properties dialog, for Available Fields, double-click Number, Name, Level, Average Estimated Illumination, and Required Lighting Level. 13 Click Calculated Value. 14 In the Calculated Value dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■

For Name, enter Lighting Delta. For Discipline, select Electrical. For Type, select Illuminance. For Formula, click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Average Estimated Illumination. Click OK.

In the Calculated Value dialog, for Formula, at the end of Average Estimated Illumination, press the spacebar, type a hyphen, and click Browse.
■ ■

In the Fields dialog, select Required Lighting Level. Click OK twice.

15 In the Schedule Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■

On the Sorting/Grouping tab, for Sort by, select Level. Select Header. Select Blank Line. On the Formatting tab, for Fields, select Lighting Delta. Click Conditional Format.

In the Conditional Formatting dialog, under Condition, for Test, select Not Between.

Creating Color Fills and Schedules | 165

16 Close the file with or without saving it.■ ■ For Value. Click Background Color. 166 | Chapter 7 Planning an Electrical System . The lighting delta values that are not within the conditional value of -5 fc and 5 fc are highlighted in red. select Red. Click OK three times. enter -5 fc and 5 fc. ■ ■ In the Color dialog. for Custom Colors.

you verify illuminance values to indicate when the lighting level requirements have been satisfied. Create a panel schedule. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Add devices and fixtures using schedule to satisfy required lighting levels. power circuits. and switch systems) by establishing logical connections between electrical components. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills In this exercise. Create power loads. you modify the color plan to illustrate the space by the Average Estimated Illumination values. 167 .Designing an Electrical System 8 In this lesson. Use the System Browser to check your design. you place lighting fixtures in the drawing. you create electrical systems (including lighting circuits. Then. Create circuits (with and without wire) to create the logical connections between devices and fixtures. as you place lighting fixtures. These values are based on internal lighting level calculations which use the space floor and wall reflectance values and workplane height to automatically calculate average illuminance or lighting levels. using the color fill plan and the space analysis schedule as an aid in lighting placement to satisfy required lighting levels. Balance wire sizes and breaker service. First.

168 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the Color dialog. ■ ■ ■ 5 Click OK. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_01_i. 4 In the Edit Color Scheme dialog: ■ Under Schemes. 6 Press ESC to deselect the legend. Under Scheme Definition. click (Open). select the color legend. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Click OK. 2 In the drawing area. for Basic Colors. for the Spaces Category. select Average Estimated Illumination.rvt. select Orange. then modify the color scheme legend to use the color fill plan as a design tool for many tasks. You can create additional color schemes.00 fc.00 fc. By using orange as the color for this range.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. we can quickly identify those areas of the building that do not meet the specified lighting requirements. 3 Click Modify Color Fill Legends tab ➤ Scheme panel ➤ Edit Scheme. click Training Files. Modify the color fill plan 1 Verify that the Level 2 .Lighting Color Fill view is open. select the color for Less Than 20. Notice that the Library has an average estimated illumination less than 20.

10 Click the Level 2 Color Fill_Lighting Plan view to make it active.277VM_Plain Recessed Lighting Fixture 600x600 . all three of these colored fields will clear to white. The order of the tiled windows is determined by the order in which the windows were activated. however the color fill plan can display within the range below the specified value because of the +/. Add fixtures 14 In the drawing area. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. 11 Click the Space Lighting Analysis view to make it active.5 fc range is satisfied. 16 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x2’ (2 Lamp) . 8 In the Project Browser. The schedule indicates the Average Estimated Illumination as yellow for values of 0 fc (conditional format). The color fill plan also indicates in orange an illumination value below 20 fc.5 fc range specified in the conditional format of this field.277. with the last activated window appearing in the upper-left corner.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans and open the Level 2 . 13 Click the Level 2 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting . 9 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. The red field will clear once the +/. and the Lighting Delta as red for values out of the +/. which is the lowest value in the specified range. 15 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Lighting Fixture. Windows are arranged in a counter-clockwise order.5 fc range.Lighting Ceiling plan. All of this works as a visual aid for the designer to insure design requirements are met. The colors will coincide with the values in the color fill legend.7 In the Project Browser. 17 Click Place Fixture tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 169 . The color fill will change colors as lighting fixtures are placed that raise the illumination level above 20 fc. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. expand Schedule/Quantities and open the Space Lighting Analysis view. Note that the lighting delta can be cleared.Lighting Ceiling Plan view to make it active. As you add lighting fixtures to the Library. the illumination values in the color fill plan and schedule analysis will automatically update. indicating a value greater than 0 fc. zoom to space Library 219.

verify that the option for Calculate Coefficient of Utilization is selected. 18 Click to place the fixture. the fixtures will move accordingly. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog. In the Space Lighting Analysis view. NOTE This option must be selected in order for lighting information to be updated in the color fill plan and schedule. 170 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .The Place on Face option allows the fixtures to be hosted by the ceiling plan. select Multiple. 26 Use the Copy command to place 2 more fixtures as shown. 20 Select the lighting fixture. 21 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 19 Press ESC to end the command. 25 On the Options Bar. so that as the ceiling plan moves vertically. 24 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. the lighting delta and average estimated illumination for space Library 219 are updated. 23 Click OK.

27 Press ESC to end the command.NOTE Object snaps are used for selecting intersections of the ceiling grid. 29 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. select the 3 fixtures. 31 Click in the drawing area to place 6 additional groups of fixtures as shown. 28 In the drawing area. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 171 . 30 On the Options Bar. select Multiple.

33 Click to activate the Schedule window. Note the value in red for the space Library 219. 172 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .32 Press ESC. Modify multiple fixture instances 34 Select the vertical center group of light fixtures. The values in the Space Lighting Analysis view are updated automatically.

37 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (2 Lamp) . Click OK. select Lighting Fixtures. click Check None. Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 173 .35 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. and for Category.277V. 36 In the Filter dialog.

38 Click to activate the Color Fill_Lighting Plan view.The values in the schedule are updated automatically. Note the changes for the space Library 219. 174 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

click the ceiling grid line as shown.277V. 42 In the drawing area.39 Repeat the previous steps to change the same group of fixtures to Recessed Parabolic Light: 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) . Adding Lighting Fixtures Using Schedules and Color Fills | 175 . The lighting delta is satisfied. 41 On the Options Bar. 40 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Align. select Multiple Alignment. Note the changes for the space Library 219.

44 Repeat the previous step to align the remaining fixtures. 176 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .43 Click the left edge of the first fixture. The fixture aligns.

click Training Files. you modify the light fixture IES files. you modify the IES data of the light fixtures with the goal of maximizing the lighting output using the fewest number of fixtures. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_02_i. 46 Close the file with or without saving it. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 177 . Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click (Open).45 Press ESC to end the command.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. In the next exercise. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures In this exercise.

178 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 . 6 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Click Edit Type. 4 In the Level 2 Lighting Plan view. zoom to space Library 219 and select the lighting fixture shown. Expand Schedules/Quantities and open Space Lighting Analysis. Note the Average Estimated Illumination value of 46 fc.Lighting Plan. scroll to view space space Library 219. 2 Tile the views as shown.Create a new lighting fixture type 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Space Lighting Analysis schedule view. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting .Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 . 5 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.Lighting Color Fill plan.

■ Click OK twice. Note the lighting type has changed to F14. select 463T5_S. enter . In the Select File dialog. for Lamp. enter F15. Apply the lighting fixture type 8 Select all the fixtures in the center column in the Library as shown. select Xenon and click OK. select T5 [HO]. Under Photometrics. Note that in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule.93. for Name enter 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . click the value for Light Loss Factor. for Color Preset.00 VA. In the Name dialog.85. Click OK. ■ ■ ■ In the Light Loss Factor dialog. for Type Mark. for Ballast Loss Factor. select Luminous Flux. click the value for Initial Intensity. specify 15000.277V and click OK. and click OK. ■ ■ ■ ■ In the Initial Intensity dialog. Under Electrical. for Apparent Load.ies and click Open. the Lighting Delta for the Library is updated. ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical Loads. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 179 . click the value for Photometric Web File and click Browse. 7 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. click the value for Initial Color. Under Photometrics.■ In the Type Properties dialog: ■ ■ Click Duplicate. Under Photometrics. For Luminaire Dirt Depreciation. Under Identity Data. ■ In the Initial Color dialog. ■ Click Apply. enter .00 lm. ■ Under Photometrics. enter 162.

click Check None. select Lighting Fixtures. 10 In the Filter dialog.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. Click OK. Remove lighting fixtures 13 Select the 3 lighting fixtures in the center column of the Library as shown. 12 Press ESC to deselect the fixtures. 180 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .277V. and for Category. 11 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select 2’x4’ (3 Lamp) T5_HO_54W . and that the lighting delta for the Library in the Space Lighting Analysis Schedule also has been updated. Note that the selected lighting fixtures have been updated.

Note the lighting delta updates again. Modifying the IES Data of Lighting Fixtures | 181 . Apply the fixture type to other fixtures 14 Click Modify tab ➤ Clipboard panel ➤ Match Type. select the top center fixture. 16 Click the other fixtures in the center to apply the fixture type.Press Delete. 15 In space Library 219.

Note that the lighting delta for the Library has been updated again.17 Click Match Fixtures tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. 182 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Remove lighting fixtures 18 Select the 2 lighting fixtures as shown.

and Receptacles In this exercise you add switches for the lighting switches and the receptacles in your project. you add switches. Placing Switches. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_03_i. Junction Boxes. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Place lighting switches 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 183 . In the next exercise. The lighting delta has been updated and is now 0.rvt. click (Open). 2 In the drawing area.Press Delete. junction boxes. and receptacles to your design. 19 Close the file with or without saving it. click Training Files. Placing Switches. The procedure for placing switches and receptacles is the same as for placing any hosted components in Revit MEP. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar.

3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting.277V. Because the switch requires a wall to serve as the host. 184 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 6 Position the switch on the interior wall as shown. it is only previewed when the cursor is over a wall. 4 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Wall Occupancy Sensor . 5 Click Place Lighting Device tab ➤ Placement tab ➤ Place on Vertical Face. 7 Click to place the switch.Regular Voltage: Passive Infrared .

NoLoad: 4” Square is selected in the Type Selector.NoLoad.rfa and click Open. 11 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. Placing Switches. The element type Junction Boxes .8 Place a second switch of the same type on the other side of the wall as shown. 12 In the Load Family dialog. 13 Position the junction box in space Computer Lab 222 as shown. Place junction boxes 10 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. browse to Revit MEP ➤ Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ Power Devices. Select Junction Boxes . 9 Press ESC to end the command. and Receptacles | 185 . Junction Boxes.

Click OK twice.Offset. 20 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Close Hidden to close other views that may be open. In the Type Properties dialog. 186 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 18 Press ESC to deselect the junction box. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Power . 15 Select the junction box.Design ➤ Floor Plans and open the Level 2 Power Plan view.14 Press ESC to end the command. 17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ Under Constraints. note the Number of Poles is 1. 16 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. zoom to space Library 219. enter 9’0”. 21 In the drawing area. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. for Level 2 . enter JB-1NL. Click Edit Type. you can enter a space to separate the unit values. NOTE When entering values. note that Apparent Load is set to 0. for Mark. Under Electrical. Place wall-hosted receptacles 19 In the Project Browser.

dock the System Browser at the bottom of your window. Click OK. and Receptacles | 187 . Placing Switches. NOTE If necessary. 24 For any column. and Voltage. 25 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click Check None. Distribution System. Space Number. Space Name. expand Unassigned and scroll space Library 219. Select Size. Expand General. and Number of Elements. right-click and click Column Settings. right-click the a column heading and click View ➤ Systems. Junction Boxes.22 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Select Load. 23 In the System Browser. Note that the values for the space Library 219 are currently blank. This list displays connectors and circuits that have not been assigned to a panel. Expand Electrical. Right-click the column heading again and click View ➤ Electrical. 26 In the System Browser.

31 Close the System Browser. 188 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 33 Position the cursor on the Move Witness Line grip as shown. 28 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Change Element Type drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 35 Select the dimension and enter 12’. 29 Click to place 2 receptacles in space Library 219 as shown. Reposition the receptacle 32 Select the receptacle on the right. 30 Scroll the System Browser to see the added receptacles. 34 Drag the grip to move the witness line to the receptacle on the left as shown.27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture.

Place additional receptacles 37 Repeat the previous steps to place a third receptacle in space Library 219 as shown. select Copy and Multiple. Placing Switches. 36 Press ESC to deselect the receptacle. 38 Select the receptacle. 39 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Junction Boxes. and Receptacles | 189 . 40 On the Options Bar.The receptacle on the right is repositioned according to the dimension you enter.

41 Click the midpoint of the receptacle. enter 12’ and press ENTER to place another receptacle. and enter 12’ and press ENTER. 190 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . move the cursor along the wall. 42 Move the cursor down.

Placing Switches. and Receptacles | 191 .43 Press ESC to end the command. Junction Boxes.

45 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Duplex Receptacle: Standard. 47 Click to place 3 floor receptacles as shown.Place floor-hosted receptacles 44 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Electrical Fixture. 46 Click Place Devices tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face. 192 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .

Next you create lighting circuits and show wire. The following diagram shows the connectivity for your electrical Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 193 . Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire In this exercise you add the electrical equipment for the distribution systems in your plan.48 Close the file with or without saving it. you need to create logical connections to define the topology. Although the connections between this type of equipment are not typically shown on plans.

equipment. zoom to the space Electrical 220. main distribution panels (H-2 and MDP). Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. You start at the low voltage panels (L-1 and L-2). Add panelboards 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. 2 In the drawing area. In this exercise you also become more familiar with the wiring settings. 194 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. then create lighting circuitry and add wiring as the circuits are created. and work toward the higher voltage.rvt. click (Open). 3 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Electrical Equipment. click Training Files. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_04_i. Adding wiring to a project is optional.

For Panel Name. for Distribution System. 8 Select the panelboard.Loads. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 195 . 10 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties.4 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select 208V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . 11 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Electrical . 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 14 Select the panelboard. for Distribution System. 6 Click to place the panelboard as shown. enter 20. 9 On the Options Bar. 13 Repeat the previous steps to place a 480V MCB Lighting and Appliance Panelboard . select 120/208 Wye. #1 Pole Breakers. 12 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard.Surface: 100A. 7 Press ESC to end the command. enter PP-2B. select 480/277 Wye.Surface: 100A panelboard as shown. 15 On the Options Bar. for Max. 5 Click Place Equipment tab ➤ Placement Panel ➤ Place on Vertical Face. Click OK.

Click OK. Click OK. enter LP-2B. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans and open Level 2 Lighting Plan view. click Check None. 23 In the Filter dialog.Loads. #1 Pole Breakers. zoom to space Instruction 221. 21 Select all fixtures and switches in the space.17 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical . select Lighting Devices and Lighting Fixtures. Note that Apparent Load Phases are dimmed because they are calculated values. enter 20. 24 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. The blue sketch graphics show the created circuit. and for Category. ■ 18 Press ESC to deselect the panelboard. 22 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 20 In the drawing area. 196 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . for Max. Add a circuit with wire 19 In the Project Browser. which is the logical connection between the elements. For Panel Name.

The red sketch graphics show the logical circuit with the home run pointing toward the selected panel. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 197 . 27 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.25 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 26 Select lighting panel LP-2B.

33 Select the switch on the right. 32 Press ESC. Add a switch 29 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Device drop-down ➤ Lighting. 198 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System .28 Press ESC to end the command. 31 Click to place the switch in the drawing area as shown. 30 Click Lighting Place Device tab ➤ Element panel drop-down and select Lighting Switches: Three Way.

35 Select the left three-way switch. Creating Lighting Circuits with Wire | 199 .34 Click Place Device tab ➤ Element panel and select Lighting Switches: Three Way from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. 36 Click the top-left lighting fixture to add to the circuit.

39 Select all items in space Instruction 221. Training File ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 200 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Click OK. select Wires. Click OK. 42 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. Note that the tick marks are updated to show 4. 38 Press ESC to end the command. 43 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ Under Electrical .Loads. for Hot Conductors. 41 In the Filter dialog. click Check None. Next you create circuits without showing wire. click (Open). 44 Close the file with or without saving it. except without wire.37 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. and for Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire This exercise is similar to the previous exercise in that you create circuits. 40 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. enter 2.

6 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. and then expand circuit 1. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. and verify that Load. click Training Files. 2 In the drawing area. Rating. 8 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Select Panel. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. and Voltage Drop are selected. 5 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Distribution System.rvt. Click OK. right-click on the Systems heading. 4 Right-click the connector and click Create Power Circuit. 17 Scroll down and expand LP-2B. and click View ➤ Systems and Electrical. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 201 . Voltage. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. 9 Select panel LP-2B in space Electrical 220. Add a circuit without wire 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open. 12 Move the System Browser pane to the bottom of the screen for easier viewing. 13 In the System Browser. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_05_i. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right and the lighting sensor. ■ 16 In the System Browser. 14 Right-click on the Systems heading and click Column Settings.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. Check circuits 11 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Expand Electrical. 15 In the Column Settings dialog: ■ ■ Expand General and review the settings. expand Power.

30 Close the System Browser. Note the addition of the junction box to circuit 2 in the System Browser.Note the circuit in space Instruction 221. right-click the connector and click Add to Circuit. Click OK. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to a panel. 27 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 18 Expand circuit 2 and note the devices. 29 Move the cursor over one of the fixtures and press TAB 3 times to view the circuit. 28 Select one of the occupancy sensors. 23 Move the cursor over one of the adjacent fixtures and click to select it. 20 Select the junction box and click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. under Electrical. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. 21 In the Instance Properties dialog. 26 Select the 4 remaining lighting fixtures and the other occupancy sensor in space Computer Lab 222. Add additional devices to the circuit 19 In the drawing area. 25 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add To Circuit. zoom to space Computer Lab 222. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 22 With the junction box still selected. change the Voltage to 277V. 202 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . View circuit information 24 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit.

Add tags to fixtures 31 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. Creating Lighting Circuits without Wire | 203 . note the label parameters and click Cancel. enter FR4. 46 Click Place Label tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal ➤ Center and Vertical ➤ Top. Click Tags. 40 Click OK twice. 32 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Deselect Leader. Notice that all 6 lighting fixture tags are updated. 36 Select the upper-left fixture. 45 Click Modify Label tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 35 Press ESC to end the command. select Lighting Fixture Tag: Standard. click Edit Type. 33 In the Tags dialog: ■ ■ For Lighting Fixtures. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. 37 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 47 In the drawing area. for Type Mark. 38 In the Instance Properties dialog. click below the first one to place it. 41 Press ESC to deselect the fixture. 34 Click each of the 6 lighting fixtures in space Computer Lab 222. Click OK. 43 Select the label name and click Modify Label tab ➤ Label panel ➤ Edit Label. Click Yes. Edit tags 42 Select a tag and click Modify Lighting Fixture Tags tab ➤ Family panel ➤ Edit Family. 44 In the Edit Label dialog. under Identity Data.

Click Save. Click OK. 57 Click Modify Lighting Fixture tab ➤ Element panel ➤ and select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard. 204 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Note the tag is updated in the drawing area. 56 In the Filter dialog. enter Lighting Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag. 53 Click Create tab ➤ Family Editor panel ➤ Load into Project. ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Select Wrap between parameters only. Click Apply and note the label parameters are divided into 2 lines in the drawing area. select Lighting_Fixture_Circuit_Switch ID Tag: Standard and click Apply. click Check None. and click Apply. Note the tags are updated in the drawing area. Click OK. For Circuit Number. 50 Drag the handle on the right side of the tag to resize it by dragging it to the left. 58 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag All. 59 In the Tag All Not Tagged dialog. Deselect Break and for Suffix. and for Category. 60 Zoom out to see the tagged fixtures. for File Name. select Circuit Number and Switch ID and click Add parameter(s) to label . Next you create a switch system. select Lighting Fixture Tags.48 In the Edit Label dialog: ■ Under Category Parameters. 49 Click Place Label tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify to end the command. enter a comma.rfa. Add tags to remaining fixtures 54 Select all the elements in space Computer Lab 222. 52 In the Save As dialog. Click OK. 51 Click ➤ Save As ➤ Family. 55 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 61 Close the file with or without saving it. select Break. Creating a Switch System In this exercise you learn how to create a switch system.

13 Click Modify Lighting Devices tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 12 Select the occupancy sensor. 6 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. enter a. zoom to space Computer Lab 222.rvt. Create a switch system 1 Verify that the Level 2 Lighting Plan view is open.Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. click Training Files. click (Open). for Switch ID. 7 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-right of the space. 9 Select the occupancy sensor. under Electrical Lighting. 11 Highlight the fixture and press TAB 4 times to see the switch system. 10 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 4 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. Note that the lighting fixture tags for the two fixtures are updated with the Switch ID. 2 In the drawing area. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_06_i. 3 Select the lighting fixture at the upper-left of the space. Click OK. 5 Click Modify Switch System tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. Creating a Switch System | 205 . 8 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch.

Lighting. 25 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Finish Editing System. 17 Click Modify Lighting Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Switch. 206 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 23 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Switch Properties. 22 Select the occupancy sensor on the bottom side of the wall. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Electrical .15 Press ESC to deselect the occupancy sensor. 18 Click Modify Switch Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Switch System. enter b. 16 Select one of the lighting fixtures below the wall. 19 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Add to System. Note the lighting fixture tags for the 4 fixtures below the wall are updated with the switch ID. 21 Click Edit Switch System tab ➤ Edit Switch System panel ➤ Select Switch. for switch ID. Click OK. 20 Select the remaining 3 lighting fixtures.

Creating Power Loads | 207 . click Training Files. lighting. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 Click Modify Electrical Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. Creating Power Loads In this exercise you will learn methods for creating power circuits (circuit groups). click Check None. select the PP-2B panel. and for Category. Click OK. zoom to space Instruction 221 and draw a pick box to select all the components in the space. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_07_i. 3 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. click (Open). The concept of grouping similar functions into systems is used to show logical connections between different components in the system.rvt. 6 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 4 In the Filter dialog. Circuits are used for power.26 Close the file with or without saving it. 7 In space Electrical 220. Next you create a circuit and size wire. 2 In the drawing area. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. select Electrical Fixtures. Add a circuit 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan view is open. and data systems.

rfa. enter 2. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 12 Press ESC to deselect the wire.Loads. navigate to Imperial Library ➤ Electrical Components ➤ TickMarks. 11 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Hook Wire Tick Mark. 18 For Neutral Wire Tick Mark. under Electrical . for Hot Conductors.8 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc. Notice the 3 tick marks is changed to 4 tickmarks. 9 Press ESC to deselect the wires. and in the drawing area. Click OK. 208 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . and click Element Properties. 14 Click Insert tab ➤ Load from Library panel ➤ Load Family. 15 In the Load Family dialog. and click Open. 10 Right-click the wire for the home run to the panel. click the minus symbol to delete a tick mark. for Ground Wire Tick Mark. and in the right pane. 17 In the left pane of the Electrical Settings dialog. select Wiring. select Long Wire Tick Mark. 19 Click OK. 13 Select the wire again. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Electrical Settings.

25 Select the homerun from space Computer Lab 222 and the wire between the first and second receptacle in space Instruction 221. Creating Power Loads | 209 . press Tab to display a preview of the circuit wiring. Combine multiple homeruns into a multi-circuit homerun 20 Highlight one of the receptacles in space Computer Lab 222.The tick mark for all ground conductors are changed to a hooked tick marks and neutral conductors display as a long tick mark. 21 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. 24 Press ESC to deselect the wires. select the PP-2B panel. as shown. and click to select the circuit. 22 In space Electrical 220. 23 Click Modify Electrical Circuits ➤ Convert to Wire panel ➤ Arc.

26 Press Delete. There are only 3 tick marks 210 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 27 Click Home tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Wire drop-down ➤ Arc. click a point halfway between the first and second receptacle to create an arc. and then click the connector of the second receptacle as shown. Notice that there are now 4 tick marks on the homerun and the wiring for space Instruction 221 and a double arrowhead to indicate the multi-circuit homeruns. 29 In space Instruction 221. and the connector on the nearest receptacle in space Computer Lab 222. add another wire between the connector on the last receptacle in 221. in space Instruction 221. click the connector of the first receptacle. 28 In the drawing area. as shown.

An additional hot conductor is added to the 221 wiring. select panel LP-2B. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service | 211 . you verify and adjust wire sizes that Revit MEP recommends for handling the loads on those circuits. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_08_i. 31 Close the file with or without saving it. Balancing loads begins with adjusting the loads at the panels farthest from the power source. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 In the drawing area. 3 In the Electrical space. Balance circuit loads 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. 30 Add wiring to space Electrical 220. Circuit loads should be balanced to present as nearly as possible an equal load to each phase. click Open. and connect its wiring to a receptacle in space Instruction 221. Finally. Notice the triple arrowhead for the homerun.rvt. zoom to space Electrical 220. Balancing Wire Size and Breaker Service In this exercise you begin by balancing the loads at the Level 1 and Level 2 panels. Next you balance the loads for your design. then you examine the loads presented at the panels to set your final breaker sizes.on the wiring that extends to the space Computer Lab 222. click Training Files. This will reduce neutral current as well as prevent an excess voltage drop due to one phase being overloaded.

5 In the Edit Circuits dialog. B. 10 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 1-#10. ■ ■ Adjust circuit breaker sizes 9 Select panel PP-2B. A warning indicates that the power system is empty and will be deleted. click Rebalance Loads. 1-#12.3616 VA). The loads are now more evenly distributed over the three phases (Phase A . 14 Close the warning dialog. 13 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Click OK. 11 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Remove from Circuit. and C shows an imbalance with the heaviest load 6932 VA on Phase A. enter 30A. and Phase C . Scroll down. 1-#10. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit: ■ ■ Scroll down and note the current value for the Wire Size parameter is 3-#12. for Rating. 1-#12.3712 VA. Verify and adjust wire sizes 7 With panel LP-2B still selected. 212 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . Revit MEP automatically calculates wire sizes based on circuit rating. and Phase C provides 2028 VA. 12 Select panel PP-2B. and note the value for the Wire Size parameter is now 3-#10. Under Electrical-Loads.4 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Electrical panel ➤ Circuits. Phase B 3636 VA. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Circuit Properties. Notice that the loads on Phase A. while Phase B provides 2004 VA. 6 Click OK.

Click OK. 23 With panel PP-2B still selected. Creating a Panel Schedule In this exercise. Creating a Panel Schedule | 213 . 19 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. 16 Click Modify Electrical Equipment tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Power. and click OK.15 Select panel PP-2B. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports and Schedules panel ➤ Panel Schedule. you create a panel schedule report for panelboard MDP-1. for Rating. 3 In the Select Panels dialog: ■ ■ ■ Click Clear Selection. Panel PP-2B is now reconnected to transformer TP-2B. The Panel Schedule Report appears in a new window. Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. under Electrical .Loads. A warning indicates that the total connected load exceeds 80% of the defined value of 20A for the circuit you are creating. click Training Files. for Rating.rvt. 21 With panel PP-2B still selected. click (Open). 24 Select the transformer TP-2B.Loads. 18 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. under Electrical . and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The circuit breaker size for panel PP-2B is now sized to handle the connected load. 17 Close the warning dialog. Select PP-2B. click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. Create the panel schedule report 1 Verify that the Level 1 Power Plan is open. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_09_i. 25 Press ESC to deselect the panel. 20 Click OK to close the warning dialog. 22 In the Instance Properties dialog for the circuit. Next you create a panel schedule. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. enter 30A. enter 25A.

for Font. and open E601 . enter 1/8. 10 In the Panel Report Appearance dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Header Text. expand Sheets (all). Next you use the System Browser to check your design. Under Body Text.rvt. click (Open). 214 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Training File ■ ■ On the Quick Access toolbar. 8 Click Modify Schedule Graphics tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties. for Font Size. select Berlin Sans FB. 12 Close the file with or without saving it. drag PP-2B onto the sheet.Panel Schedules. and open Imperial\03_Electrical Systems\RME_Elec_Design_10_i. for Font Size. 7 Select the schedule. 11 Click OK twice. Under Header Text. 4 Close the report.NOTE If a panel schedule has already been created for a panel. This dialog allows you to control how the panel schedule report displays when it is included on a sheet. under Reports ➤ Panel Schedule. enter 3/32. The Panel Report Appearance dialog displays. The System Browser is a useful tool for checking the design and locating components in your project. the panel will not appear in the Select Panels dialog. Under Header Text. 5 In the Project Browser. for Appearance. 6 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. You also learn to use the Check Circuits tool to verify that all of the circuits in your plan are connected. under Other. Checking Your Design In this exercise you learn how to use the System Browser to examine the circuitry that you created in previous exercises. select Bold and Italic. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. click Edit.

In the System Browser. Note the receptacle in space Lounge 212. 6 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall and press TAB once. In the System Browser. There are 4 devices connected to circuit 2. The System Browser also provides the name and number of the space in which the devices are located. 11 Select the receptacle on the right side wall. note that the receptacle is not connected to any circuit. 10 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Add to Circuit.View unassigned components 1 Verify that the Level 2 Power Plan is open. ■ ■ 5 In the drawing area. The System Browser provides another way of viewing information about the circuits that are connected to panel PP-2C. Checking Your Design | 215 . 7 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the right side wall and press TAB once. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. press TAB once. 3 Move the System Browser to the bottom of the drawing area. Expand Power ➤ PP-2C ➤ circuit 2. 8 Move the cursor over the receptacle on the bottom wall. 4 In the System Browser: ■ Right-click a column heading. Expand Unassigned. and then click the receptacle to select the circuit. select space Lounge 212. 12 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. Check circuits 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ Check Systems panel ➤ Check Circuits. each with a load of 180VA. Notice that the receptacle on the right side wall is not connected to circuit 2. and click AutoFit All Columns to resize the columns in the System Browser. 9 Click Modify Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. notice that PP-2C for circuit 2 is updated.

23 Close the file with or without saving it. 19 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ Systems Tools panel ➤ Select Panel. under Warnings. 20 On the Options Bar. Notice that panel LP-2C is not connected. 21 Click Electrical Circuits tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit Circuit. 17 In the drawing area. select MDP-1. expand the warning category for Circuit is not assigned to a panel ➤ Warning 2. zoom to space Electrical 214. 216 | Chapter 8 Designing an Electrical System . 16 Close the details dialog. for Panel. 18 Select panel LP-2C. Panel LP-2C is now connected to the main distribution panel MDP-1.14 In the warning window that is displayed indicating an unconnected power connector. click (Expand warning dialog) to view details of the warning. 22 Click Edit Circuit tab ➤ Edit Circuit panel ➤ Finish Editing Circuit. 15 In the dialog.

Creating a Plumbing System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a plumbing system. 217 .

218 .

Vent.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and specify the default fittings that will be used with this type.rvt.Sanitary. you prepare to design the plumbing system by: ■ ■ ■ ■ Creating a PVC Sanitary Pipe type. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . In this lesson. 3 In the Type Properties dialog. In this exercise. and verify that Level 1 . right-click PVC . type PVC .Planning a Plumbing System 9 Creating plumbing systems in Revit MEP is similar to any design project. click Training Files. planning is critical to a successful design. and click OK. Loading pipe fittings required by the plumbing system.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. in addition to loading existing families. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing\RME_Plumb_Planning_01_i. 4 In the Name dialog. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. Configuring a Plumbing and Piping System Revit MEP provides families of common plumbing components that you place in your plumbing plan. 219 . Adding a pipe size. and click Properties. click Duplicate. you create a PVC pipe type. Specifying default sanitary piping settings for the main and branch piping.Plumbing Plan . You load the families of components that are required for your plumbing systems. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

select Branch.5 In the Type Properties dialog. Load piping component families 7 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 18 For System Type. for Material. click Training Files. and click Main. enter 5/8''.Vent is listed.Sch 40 . 23 In the Add Pipe Size dialog. select Pipe Settings ➤ Sizes. 27 For the new pipe size. select Tee Reducing Double Vent . Tee. 24 For Inside Diameter. for Nominal. select Sanitary. 19 Specify the same settings for the Branch sanitary piping as you used for the Main. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. select Tee Vent .PVC . enter -4' . 21 In the right pane. under Pipe Types. 16 Specify settings for the Main sanitary piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. DWV represents Domestic Waste Vent. Add a pipe size 20 In the left pane. and click OK. 15 For System Type. 22 Click New Size.Sch 40 . select Pipe Types: PVC Sanitary. enter 10°.rfa. 220 | Chapter 9 Planning a Plumbing System .DWV: Standard. 14 Expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. and open Imperial\Families\Trap P . select Tee. verify that Used in Size Lists and Used in Sizing are selected. Tap. NOTE For additional information on the Mechanical Settings. refer to Revit MEP Online Help.DWV. click Pipe Settings. Specify sanitary piping settings 11 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ .DWV: Standard. 10 On the Selection panel. 6 Click OK.0''. Cross. enter 27/32''. select None. 12 In the left pane of the Mechanical Settings dialog. PVC . select Plastic. 9 In the left pane of the Load Family dialog. enter 1/2''. The new pipe type is listed in the Project Browser under Families ➤ Pipe Fittings. for: ■ ■ ■ ■ Preferred Junction Type. 25 For Outside.PVC . 26 Click OK. 8 Click Place Pipe Fitting tab ➤ Model panel ➤ Load Family. 17 In the left pane.PVC . For Offset. In the Project Browser. select Sanitary. under Mechanical. 13 In the right panel. click Modify.Sch 40 . for Pipe Connector Tolerance. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion.

Create the sanitary plumbing system. and hot and cold water piping. add a hot water heater.Designing a Plumbing System 10 In this lesson. Create the cold water system. you design the plumbing system for the Level 1 men’s room in a commercial building. Add a sanitary and vent stack to the system. Create the hot water system. You learn to: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Place sanitary plumbing fixtures. and create piping to physically connect the sinks to the hot water system. including plumbing fixtures. sanitary piping. Create piping to connect sinks to the sanitary system. vent. and add piping to physically connect the fixtures to the system. 221 .

you add 2 toilets. 222 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 2 Zoom in to the bottom middle area of the floor plan.rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures In this exercise. You place 3 sinks in a later exercise. as shown. Place wall-mounted toilets 1 In the Project Browser. click Training Files. 1 urinal. and a floor drain to the level 1 men’s room. move the cursor over a space and refer to the tooltip or the Status Bar for information. NOTE To identify a space name and number. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_01_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . including the men’s room (space Male 107). and verify that Level 1 .Plumbing Plan .Design is open. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.

select Public . 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture. in the Type Selector.1.Flush Valve .6 gpf. 5 On the Placement panel. 1 wall-mounted urinal. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected.Wall Mounted.The men's room is partitioned for 2 toilet stalls. 4 On the Element panel. under Water Closet . against the left wall. as shown. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 223 . centered on the bottom horizontal reference line. and 3 sinks. 6 Click to place a toilet in the accessible toilet space. Reference lines are included in the plan view to make it easier to place components.

Wall Hung. 224 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 3/4'' Flush Valve.) 8 Press Esc. 10 Click to place the urinal in the space above the 2 toilet spaces. use the reference line to center the fixture. NOTE If it is difficult to align the urinal to the reference line. under Urinal . and press Esc. (Again. zoom in closer. Place a wall-mounted urinal 9 In the Type Selector.7 Click to place another toilet. above the first in the standard toilet space.

under Floor Drain . In placing the fixture.Place a floor drain 11 In the Type Selector.2'' Drain. select 5''x5'' Strainer . 14 Click Modify. you select the floor as the face because this is a floor mounted drain. 12 On the Placement panel. Adding Sanitary Plumbing Fixtures | 225 . 13 Click to place the drain above and to the right of the accessible toilet (at approximately 6'' and 6'' from the intersection of the reference lines for the 2 toilet areas). click Place on Face.Rectangular.

a urinal. Creating a Sanitary System This is the first of 3 exercises that guide you through creating the piping for the men’s room sanitary plumbing system. and Default Domestic Cold Water.rvt. You then use Revit MEP’s Layout Path tools to create sloped piping to connect the fixtures to a sanitary outlet. 19 Expand Default Sanitary. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_02_i. and notice that there are 2 default systems: Default Sanitary. In this exercise. and dock it by dragging it to the bottom of the drawing area. and review the components listed under this system. The default systems contain the fixtures that you placed. 20 Expand the Default Domestic Cold Water folder. In the left pane of the Open dialog. The fixtures are included in the default system based on the connectors included with the components (sanitary connectors and cold water connectors). 226 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 18 Expand the Unassigned folder. right-click in the System Browser table heading. and notice that the drain is not included because it does not have a cold water connector. 21 Close the file with or without saving it. you create a sanitary system consisting of the toilets. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. and click View ➤ Piping.Open the System Browser 15 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 17 If all disciplines are displayed. 16 Click the title bar for the browser. and a floor drain.

Only plumbing fixtures are selected. Creating a Sanitary System | 227 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. 7 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.Plumbing Plan . and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. starting in the lower left and moving to the upper right corner. 5 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. and click OK. 4 Zoom in to the plumbing fixtures in both views. verify that Plumbing Fixtures is selected. clear Lines (<Overhead>). 8 In the Filter dialog.Design is open. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Create the sanitary plumbing system 1 In the Project Browser. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and verify that Level 1 . draw a selection box around the fixtures in the men's room. 6 In the plan view.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing.

228 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .9 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Sanitary. You include the bathroom space number in the name. click Finish Editing System. The components that were listed under the default system are now included in the Sanitary 107 system. If you deselected the drain. All of the fixtures except for the drain also have cold water connectors. enter Sanitary 107. 11 On the Options Bar. for System Name. 13 In the Systems Browser. and notice that Sanitary 107 is listed. 12 On the Edit System panel. so the Create Sanitary System is available. the Create Cold Water System option would also be available. and the empty default sanitary folder is deleted. The fixtures you selected all have sanitary connectors. expand Sanitary. 10 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System.

a toilet. A preview of the piping layout displays. 18 Click to select a point to the left of the accessible toilet. select Sanitary 107.Create physical connections 14 In the plan view. The base creates a vertical pipe for the system to connect into and establishes a source or an outlet for flow. and click OK. The base is placed. Creating a Sanitary System | 229 . 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Place Base. 15 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. at the midpoint of the detail lines. select one of the components in the system. as shown. for example. 16 In the Select a System dialog.

21 On Options Bar. The default settings are automatically modified. select Main. it is helpful to be able to change the defaults as you work. for Offset. enter -4'-0”. The elevation of the base with relation to the other components in the system is critical. and modify it to meet project requirements. 24 In the left pane. enter -1' 0''. for Diameter. 22 In the left pane of the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog. 26 On the Options Bar. select 4''. enter 1/8'' / 12''. select Branch. 27 Click Modify. and click OK. The elevation is specified low enough to allow sloping of the sanitary piping in the system. select Intersections. 25 On the Options Bar. The positive value slopes the pipe down toward the base point. 23 For Offset. for Slope. and for Offset. and click Settings. When laying out a number of different systems with different offset requirements.19 On the Options Bar. 20 On the Generate Layout panel. for Solution Type. click (Next Solution) until Solution Type 2 of 7 is selected. click Solutions. enter -1' 0''. 230 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . You accept this suggested solution. You override the default pipe settings before applying the recommended pipe layout.

select the vertical route path segments.Customize the suggested layout 28 While pressing Ctrl. and move the cursor to the left to align all 4 segments to the base point. Creating a Sanitary System | 231 . 29 Click the move parallel control (4-way arrow).

and drag the line to the left to snap perpendicular to the main. 32 Select the vertical branch line for one of the toilets.30 In the 3D view. 232 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . as shown. use the ViewCube to orient the view. 31 Click Modify. as shown.

Creating a Sanitary System | 233 . adjust the vertical branch line for the other toilet. click Finish Layout. 34 On the Generate Layout panel.33 Using the previous method.

■ ■ ■ ■ 1=Branch in a network 2=Branch in a network including the branch objects 3=Branch in a network up to a piece of equipment 4=Network (including fixtures) 36 Click to select the fitting to the drain. and examine the sanitary tee to verify proper orientation. select the fitting and click to reorient it.Examine the piping Complete all steps in this section in the 3D Plumbing view. When a fitting is reversed. and press Tab 4 times to check connectivity. 35 Highlight one of the plumbing fixtures. 234 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .

38 Close the file with or without saving it. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System In this exercise. The slope control for every segment should indicate the slope is toward the sanitary outlet. and check the slope control. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 235 . adding sinks in the men’s room. as shown. and manually creating the piping that connects them to the sanitary system. you continue with the work from the last exercise.37 Select the pipe segment to the right of the fitting.

rvt. verify that Place on Vertical Face is selected. 2 Zoom in to the men’s room (Space Male 107). click Training Files. 4 On the Element panel. 6 Click to place the sink centered on the top horizontal reference line. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is open.Design ➤ Floor Plans. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . under Lavatory .Rectangular. and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_03_i.Public. and verify that Level 1 . as shown. 236 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . select 22''x22'' . Add sinks to the layout 1 In the Project Browser. 5 On the Placement panel. in the Type Selector. 3 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Plumbing Fixture.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.Plumbing Plan .

in this step you can enter 2 4 (two space four) to specify 2' 4''. 9 Make 2 copies of the sink: ■ ■ ■ Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 237 . 8 Select the sink. Click the right endpoint of the placement reference line for the sink to establish a start point. TIP When entering dimensions. and press Enter to create a second sink.7 Click Modify. without having to enter ' and '' symbols. On the Options Bar. enter 2' 4''. For example. ■ Move the cursor up above the top reference line. select Multiple. you can enter a space to separate the value for feet and inches.

■ ■ Enter 2' 4''. Press Esc. and press Enter to create the third sink. 11 In the System Browser. 12 In the drawing area. click Add To System. 14 On the Edit Piping System panel. 13 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. and position the browser window at the bottom of the screen. 15 Click the 3 sinks. Add sinks to the sanitary system 10 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. select a component of the Sanitary 107 system. click Finish Editing System. 238 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 16 On the Edit System panel. expand Sanitary ➤ Sanitary 107.

double-click 3D Plumbing. notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) have been added to the Sanitary 107 system. 20 Select the fitting. and click Draw Pipe. right-click the top connector (sanitary connector). and zoom in to the elbow fitting for the urinal. with the tee fitting selected. 22 In the plan view. Create piping to connect the sinks 17 In the Project Browser.Design ➤ 3D Views. and click the + control on the left to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 18 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 21 Select the tee. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 239 . under Design ➤ Plumbing . 19 In the 3D view.In the System Browser. use the ViewCube to orient the view. as shown.

When you press the Spacebar. 27 Click Modify. the pipe being drawn automatically assumes the size and elevation of the fitting. In this example.6''. 240 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Offset. press Spacebar. for Slope. piping connected to the sanitary system displays in olive green. 26 On the Options Bar. and click Apply. NOTE Piping is displayed according to color filters specified in the Visibility/Graphics Overrides dialog. 25 Move the cursor up to the centerline of the middle sink. and click to draw the pipe. enter 2' .23 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch off this option. enter 1/8'' / 12''. 24 On the Options Bar.

31 Click Modify.DWV. 30 In the 3D view.PVC . under Wye 45 Deg Double . and click the lower rotate control to align the fitting parallel to the sinks. move the cursor over the stub pipe.Sch 40 .3D view shown for clarity 28 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. and when the vertical center line displays. click to place the fitting. 29 In the Type Selector. 32 Select the double wye fitting. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 241 . select Standard.

39 Draw the pipe as shown: ■ Draw at a 45 degree angle up and to the right. 38 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Placement Tools panel ➤ Automatically Connect to switch on this option. 36 In the section view. and press Enter. 242 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Draw Pipe. double-click the section head to open the section view. right-click the right connector. you add pipe segments to the double wye. and press Enter. zoom in to the double wye fitting. 37 Select the fitting. In the next steps. for Offset. enter 1'. Add pipe stubs to the double wye 35 In the plan view. 34 Press Esc. on the Options Bar.33 With the fitting selected. enter 6''.

41 Using the same method. and click to place the pipe. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 243 . draw similar piping for the left sink (the first segment angled at 135°).Entering a length dimension while drawing pipes activates Revit MEP’s listening dimension tool. 42 Click Modify. 40 Click Modify. which automatically sets the length of the pipe to the value entered. ■ Move the cursor horizontally to the right until the end of the pipe segment intersects with the centerline of the right sink. 43 Select the center vertical pipe in the double wye fitting. as shown.

press Spacebar. 47 Move the cursor down.44 Drag the upper control until the pipe aligns with the centerline of the horizontal piping. enter 6''. and press Esc. Add P-Trap Fittings 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile so you can see all 3 views. 48 Click Modify. draw a 6'' pipe for the other 2 sinks. draw a selection box around the left sink to select it. right-click the bottom connector. 49 Using the same method. and press Enter to create the segment of pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 244 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 46 In the section view.

select the P-Trap on the left. and click the rotate control 3 times to orient the pipe toward the double wye piping. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 245 .PVC . 51 In the Type Selector. under Trap P . You adjust the orientation after placing all 3 P-Traps. 53 Using the same method. click to place the P-Trap at the endpoint of the stub pipe for the top sink. 54 Click Modify. You can see in the 3D view that it is connected. 56 Using the same method. rotate the P-Trap for the other 2 sinks. select Standard.50 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. 52 In the plan view.DWV. 55 In the 3D view. place a P-Trap on the other 2 sinks.Sch 40 .

select the left P-Trap. In the plan view. and click Draw Pipe. Click Modify. click to select the P-Trap for the middle sink. 246 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 59 Connect the middle sink using a routing solution: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.57 Finish the connection for the left sink: ■ ■ ■ In the 3D view.. Select the double wye pipe on the left. Click in the plan view. The piping is connected and the appropriate fittings are automatically created. 58 Using the same method. Move the cursor to the left. and press Enter. right-click the left connector on the P-Trap. enter 6''. connect the right sink to the double wye. Click Modify Pipe Fittings tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.

while pressing Ctrl. and select the vertical section of pipe from the wye. In the Type Selector. On the Routing Solutions panel. Routing Solutions tools are activated that let you add control points or remove control points. and select a proposed solution. click Finish to select the recommended solution. Adding Sinks to the Sanitary System | 247 . ■ ■ ■ ■ Specify a slope 60 In the 3D view. select the section of pipe you just drew.■ In the 3D view. Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Routing Solutions. select the 3 horizontal pipes from the sinks. Press Esc. select PVC Sanitary. as shown. under Pipe Types. while pressing Ctrl.

and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_04_i. 65 Close the file with or without saving it. 63 On the Slope Editor panel. 64 Select a pipe that you just modified. You have appropriately sloped the pipe. 62 On the Options Bar. and verify the slope. adjusting the sanitary stack. verify that 1/8'' / 12'' is selected. click Finish.rvt.61 Click Modify Pipes tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Slope. Refining the Sanitary Stack In this exercise. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. you continue with the work on the sanitary system. 248 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . for Slope.

Floor level line.Design. 5 Select the tee. as shown. right-click the top connector. under Wye Combination with 8th Bend . and adjust the views as necessary to view the plumbing. Sections (Building Section) ➤ Section 38.Add a vertical soil stack 1 In the Project Browser. 9 In the Type Selector. 3 In the Section view. 7 On the Selection panel.PVC . 2 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Overall.Plumbing Plan . Add a reducing wye to the stack 8 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting. select Standard. 4 Click the top + control to upgrade the fitting to a tee. 10 In the 3D view.Design. select the elbow fitting on the right. click Modify. and click the intersection to place the fitting. 6 Move the cursor up to the 02 . select the vertical stack.DWV. and click to draw the pipe. Refining the Sanitary Stack | 249 . 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing. and click Draw Pipe. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing .Sch 40 . and open the following views: ■ ■ ■ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 .

11 Click Modify. 250 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System .DWV. select Standard. 13 Click the rotate control once. 14 On the Options Bar. 18 In the plan view. 12 Select the fitting. enter 1'-0”. for Offset. and click the rotate control to change the orientation. under Plug . click the midpoint at the end of the sanitary pipe. Add a pipe plug to cap the cleanout 16 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Fitting.Sch 40 .PVC . as shown. 15 Press Esc. 17 In the Type Selector.

Creating the Cold Water System | 251 . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_05_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans.Plumbing Plan .Design is open. The plug is added to the end to cap off the cleanout.rvt. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open.19 Click Modify. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . 20 Close the file with or without saving it. and verify that Level 1 . A cleanout is required on all vertical stacks. In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating the Cold Water System In this exercise. you create the domestic cold water system and add piping to connect all of the fixtures in the men’s room to the system. click Training Files. Specify mechanical settings for the hot and cold water systems 1 In the Project Browser.

(Remember to specify Domestic Cold Water as the System Type. and for System Type. 3 In the left pane of the Mechanical settings dialog. minimize the Sanitary system. select Domestic Hot Water. and sinks. 5 Specify options for the Main hot water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. select Branch. for System Type. double-click 3D Plumbing . and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Cold Water system. These categories include all of the components placed earlier that have relevant connectors. enter 9' 3''. and notice that Default Domestic Hot Water and Default Domestic Cold Water systems are listed. and position the browser at the bottom of the screen. 6 In the left pane.2 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ . 252 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . (Do not select the floor drain because it does not have a hot or cold water connector. select Domestic Hot Water. draw a selection box to select the toilets. you specify different offset elevations for the cold water piping and the hot water piping. To minimize opportunities for piping interference. and click OK. expand Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. urinal. select Domestic Cold Water. for System Type. For Offset. Create the cold water system 11 In the Project Browser. 9 In the left pane. if necessary. select Plumbing Fixtures.Design ➤ 3D Views.) 16 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter.) 10 Click OK. expand Unassigned. and click Main. 15 In the plan view. select Pipe Types: Water. select Pipe Types: Water. select Main. 13 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. 17 In the Filter dialog. For Offset. click Check None. select Branch. 8 Specify options for the Main cold water piping: ■ ■ For Pipe Type. 7 In the left pane. verify that the value is 9' 0''. under Design ➤ Plumbing .Overall. and specify the same settings for the Branch Domestic Hot Water system. 12 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile. 14 In the System Browser. 4 In the right pane.

For Flow Conversion Method. click Edit System. 20 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For System Name. 21 On the Edit System panel. 24 Click the horizontal water main above the toilets. 19 On the System Tools panel. 23 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. Expand Domestic Cold Water ➤ DCW 107 to verify the components. Create piping for the cold water system 22 In the 3D view. notice that the Default Domestic Cold water system is removed because all of the fixtures have been added to the DCW 107 system. click Finish Editing System.18 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Cold Water. Creating the Cold Water System | 253 . indicating that it is now part of the cold water system. verify that Predominantly Flush Valves is selected. enter DCW 107. select the toilet closest to the vertical soil stack. Notice that the water main displays in blue. In the System Browser.

29 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ ■ For Diameter. 254 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and press Enter. For Offset. 30 In the plan view. 34 In the plan view. select the sink above the urinal. connect the second toilet. and press Enter. 32 Move the cursor to the right. as shown. select Water. 38 Move the cursor up to the top of the third sink. 36 Move the cursor to the left. and click to place the pipe. as shown. For Slope. enter 7''. 26 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe. enter 3' . 28 In the Type Selector. 33 Click Modify. 35 In the Type Selector. enter 10'. for Offset. press Spacebar so that the pipe assumes the size and elevation of the existing pipe. and click Draw Pipe. 37 On the Options Bar. select 3/4''. click to the left of the urinal. enter 0”/12”. right-click the top DCW connector. and click the connector.2 7/8''. 27 On the Placement Tools panel. for Offset. enter 4'0”. at the intersection of the water main pipe.25 Using the same method. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. under Pipe Types. 31 On the Options Bar. verify that Automatically Connect is selected.

39 Move the cursor to the left. select Connector 1 : Domestic Cold Water : Round : 1'' : In. 41 Select the top sink. 40 Click Modify. 43 Click the branch cold water pipe. and click OK. Creating the Cold Water System | 255 . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. (Status Bar indicates Horizontal and [Pipes : Pipe Types : Water]). and click to connect to the main cold water line. 42 In the Select Connector dialog. The sink is connected to the cold water branch piping.

connect the middle sink to the branch pipe. 45 Close the file with or without saving it.44 Using the same method. 256 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . add a water heater. and add piping to connect the sinks in the menu’s room to the system. you create the hot water system. Creating the Hot Water System In this exercise.

while pressing Ctrl. 6 In the plan view. Notice that the 3 sinks (lavatories) are listed. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . expand the Unassigned folder. and expand the Default Domestic Hot Water system.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Plumbing . and position the browser at the bottom of the screen.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open. Create the hot water system 1 In the Project Browser. and verify that Level 1 . 4 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. Creating the Hot Water System | 257 .Design ➤ Floor Plans. select the 3 sinks.rvt. open Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing . and open Imperial\04_Plumbing Systems\RME_Plumb_Design_06_i.Plumbing Plan . click Training Files. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 5 In the System Browser. 2 In the Project Browser. 3 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.Design is open.Overall.

verify that DCW 107 is selected. enter Domestic Hot Water 107. 15 In the System Browser. you edit the system to add equipment. 258 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 13 In the plan view. Default Domestic Hot Water. 12 In the Type Selector.) Add the water heater to DCW 107 16 Select a sink in the men’s room. When designing systems. You add the water heater to the Domestic Cold Water system first.Tankless. 10 In the System Browser.7 Click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Domestic Hot Water. for System Name. 17 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. select 0. in the Unassigned folder. 14 Click Modify. as shown. Default Other folders are created and the Water Heater is listed. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Edit System. and click OK. Add a water heater 11 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. Default Domestic Cold Water. 8 Click Modify Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ System Properties.6 Gallon. (The folders are created according to the connectors available on the hot water heater. In later steps. click to position the water heater in the lower left corner of the utility room above the bathroom. the Domestic Hot Water 107 system is listed along with the 3 sinks (lavatories). a best practice to maximize operation is to assign all components to the appropriate system and clear the default folders. under Water Heater .

19 Select the water heater. as shown. 23 On the Options Bar. Creating the Hot Water System | 259 . 22 In the Type Selector. and press Enter. verify that Pipe Types: Water is selected. and click the water main line. enter 10’. enter 1' 6''. 21 On the Placement Tools panel. Offset: 4' 6''. 26 Move the cursor to the right. 27 Click Modify. Connect the water heater to the cold water supply 20 In the plan view. specify: ■ ■ ■ Diameter: 1''. The tankless water heater is connected to the cold water supply. for Offset. right-click the middle left connector. and select Draw Pipe. select the water heater. 25 On the Options Bar. Slope: 0''/12''.18 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Add To System. click Finish Editing System. 24 Move the cursor up. verify that Automatically Connect is selected. and on the Edit System panel.

and on the Placement Tools panel. 36 Move the cursor down. 29 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel. and click just to the left of the cold water pipe. enter 1' 6''. 33 On the Edit System panel. for Offset. enter 9' 0''. as shown. 35 On the Options Bar. 37 On the Options Bar. enter 1''. and press Enter. click Edit System. for Diameter. and for Offset. 260 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . 38 Move the cursor to the right. click Automatically Connect to switch it off.Add the water heater to Domestic Hot Water 107 28 In the plan view. click Finish Editing System. 32 Click the tankless hot water heater. select 4'-6''. 31 Click Edit Piping System tab ➤ Edit Piping System panel ➤ Select Equipment. select Domestic Hot Water 107. and in the System Selector. right-click the bottom connector (domestic hot water). select a sink. Connect the water heater to the hot water supply 34 Select the water heater. 30 On the System Tools panel. and click Draw Pipe.

as shown. 41 Move the cursor down. enter 2' 8''. 42 Click Modify. 40 On the Options Bar.39 Move the cursor down. for Offset. and click just above the bottom sink. Creating the Hot Water System | 261 . and press Enter. enter 1’.

44 Select the horizontal pipe that you just drew. select the left sink (the one closest to the urinal). 45 Using the same method and the Connect Into tool. connect the other 2 sinks to the hot water pipe.43 In the 3D view. 262 | Chapter 10 Designing a Plumbing System . and click Modify Plumbing Fixtures tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into. The hot water pipe is automatically connected to the sink.

47 Optional: Open the RME_Plumb_Design_07_i. Creating the Hot Water System | 263 .rvt project and view the vent piping for the plumbing system.46 Close the file with or without saving it.

264 .

Creating a Fire Protection System In this tutorial. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to plan and design a fire protection system. 265 .

266 .

The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory.Planning a Fire Protection System 11 The most common method of designing systems in Revit MEP is to work within a linked architectural building model. you begin work on the project that contains a wet fire protection system.autodesk. A copy is made of the Standard pipe type. you can choose to save your work. go to http://www. If the tutorial training files are not present. You create a new pipe type. However. Create a pipe type 1 In the Project Browser. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. After finishing each exercise. In this lesson. Specifying Pipe Settings In this exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_01_i. 267 . To learn more about linking and preparing an architectural model. you will use a project file that has already been linked to an architectural model. expand Families ➤ Pipes ➤ Pipe Types. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. with Space components placed in the areas throughout the model.rvt.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. and then you configure conversion settings that you will use when you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. click Training Files. see Planning Mechanical Systems in the Mechanical Systems tutorial. you will create a wet fire protection system for the second floor of an office building. In this tutorial. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click Duplicate. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. 2 Right-click Standard. You will also check a Space Schedule that you can use to assess the coverage for the fire protection systems. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session.

Configuring the Conversion settings is usually a one-time process unless you need to change them during your project. you create a sprinkler zone project parameter. 6 In the Project Browser. so the pipe main will be offset from level 2. and then click OK. select Main. or architectural components.3 Right-click the copy (Standard 2). ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. 8 In the Mechanical Settings dialog: ■ ■ In the left pane. for Material. you create project parameters and work with schedules. You then assign spaces in the top portion of the plan to one zone and spaces in the bottom portion to another zone. and click Properties. duct. For Pipe Type. you modify the type properties of the pipe. You can configure the Conversion settings at the beginning or during your project. you created a new pipe type for the wet fire protection system and modified its type properties. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. verify that 9' 0" is selected. The conversion settings for the Fire Protection Wet system type display. click Rename. You now specify the conversion settings for the pipe branches. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 10 Close the file with or without saving it. In this exercise. For Pipe Type. Next. 9 Click OK. 268 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . NOTE Conversion settings are applied when you convert the pipe layout path to physical piping. You also configured the conversion settings for both wet and dry fire protection systems. The new pipe type is created based on the Standard pipe type. For Offset. In the next exercise. Level 2 is the referenced level for the views where you will be designing. In the left pane. structural beams. For Offset. verify that 9' 0" is specified. Determining Zone Requirements In this exercise. However. under Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion. select Carbon Steel. under Mechanical. 5 In the Type Properties dialog. select Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet. you should configure or verify the Conversion settings before you convert a layout path. This is useful for avoiding interference with pipes. select Fire Protection Wet. select Pipe Settings ➤ Conversion ➤ Branch. This offset elevation places the pipe branches at 9 feet above the referenced level for the views. 4 Right-click Fire Protection Wet. verify that Pipe Types : Fire Protection Wet is listed. Configure pipe conversion settings 7 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ MEP Settings drop-down ➤ Mechanical Settings. select Fire Protection Wet. For System Type. For System Type. and enter Fire Protection Wet.

Under Categories. and then click OK. 4 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter Data. indicating that it’s the active view. In the left pane of the Open dialog.Design is highlighted. under Fire Protection. select Spaces. and the tooltip and status bar display the space name.rvt. right-click.Fire Protection Plan . 7 In the Instance Properties dialog. Determining Zone Requirements | 269 . enter Sprinkler Zone. When you highlight a space using the cursor. 3 In the Project Parameters dialog. select Fire Protection. select space Instruction 221 as shown. You draw a crossing window from the lower left to the upper right of the area you want to enclose. for Name. select the upper half of the building.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 5 Click OK twice. enter Zone 1. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . 8 Using a crossing window. click Add. click Training Files. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_02_i.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. 2 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Parameters. and click Element Properties. 6 In the drawing area. Create project parameters 1 In the Project Browser. the space crossing lines display. for Sprinkler Zone.

11 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. for Sprinkler Zone. under Fire Protection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. to which you add various parameters.rvt. and then access instance properties. 13 Using the same method. 12 In the Instance Properties dialog. enter Zone 2. You modify the schedules and add an embedded schedule in order to use the schedule as a design tool. 10 In the Filter dialog. 14 In the Instance Properties dialog. 16 Close the file with or without saving it. 15 Press Esc to clear the selection. verify that only Spaces are selected. and then click OK.9 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. In the left pane of the Open dialog. you create schedules for sprinkler design. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule In this exercise. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Planning_03_i. for Sprinkler Zone. and click OK. 270 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . including a calculated value parameter. filter the bottom half of the building to select only Spaces. and then click OK. select Zone 1. under Fire Protection. click Training Files.

indicating that it’s the active view. 7 Click OK. select Maximum Spacing. 8 In the Schedule Properties dialog. enter Sprinkler Spacing and Coverage Area Schedule. select To the nearest 1'. enter Maximum Spacing. and on the ribbon. 14 Select the new header. click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Rows: New. do the following: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use project settings. 11 Click OK twice. create a parameter named Maximum Coverage Area that is an Area type and is grouped under Fire Protection. In the Maximum Spacing column. click the Formatting tab. For Rounding. select Spaces. 10 In the Format dialog. Click OK. The schedule displays. Select Schedule keys. For Name. 9 On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 271 . Click OK.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . For Group parameter under. For Units. enter Light. 2 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. For Type of Parameter. enter Protection Area Construction Type. 15 In the new row: ■ ■ In the Protection Area Type column. For Key name. 5 In the Parameter Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Parameter data. enter 15. and click Field Format. 13 To resize the column widths in the schedule. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . Obstructed-Combustible. select Length. 6 Using the same method. select Feet and fractional inches.Create a key schedule 1 In the Project Browser.Fire Protection Plan . select Fire Protection. click Add Parameter. Add schedule data 12 Select the header in the Key Name column and enter Protection Area Type as the new header. 3 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ Under Category. Notice that the schedule name and the phase are automatically added. ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a schedule parameter 4 In the Schedule Properties dialog. double-click on each column separator.Design is highlighted. for Name.

NOTE The units of measure display automatically. enter Sprinkler Schedule. Obstructed-Combustible Extra. add more schedule data: Protection Area Type Light. under Available fields. Obstructed-Noncombustible Extra. Click OK. 18 In the New Schedule dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Category. and press Enter. select Spaces. Unobstructed Extra. double-click in the order listed: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Number Name Sprinkler Zone Level Area Protection Area Construction Type 272 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . Unobstructed Maximum Spacing 15' Maximum Coverage Area 200 SF 15' 12' 12' 12' 15' 15' 200 SF 90 SF 90 SF 90 SF 130 SF 130 SF 15' 130 SF Create a sprinkler schedule 17 Click Analyze tab ➤ Reports & Schedules panel ➤ Schedule/Quantities. based on the parameter settings you specified previously. For Name. Obstructed-Noncombustible Light. enter 130. 16 Using the same method. Unobstructed Ordinary. Obstructed-Noncombustible Ordinary. Obstructed-Combustible Ordinary.■ In the Maximum Coverage Area column. Specify fields and create a calculated value parameter ■ In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ On the Fields tab.

The Sprinkler Schedule displays. and click Field Format. This calculated value parameter allows you to immediately determine what spaces meet the sprinkler design requirements. 19 Click the Formatting tab. For Then by. select Common. For Rounding. For Units. enter Minimum Sprinklers. for Sorting/Grouping. In the Calculated Value dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Name. and click OK. select Minimum Sprinklers. select Fixed. For Formula. and click View Properties. For Discipline. select Area. For Type. select Sprinkler Zone. The resulting formula is Area/Maximum Coverage Area. select Level. under Other. 21 In the Format dialog: ■ ■ ■ Clear Use default settings. In the Fields dialog. click . 20 On the Formatting tab. Organize schedule data 23 Right-click in the schedule. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 273 . and then use the method learned previously to select Maximum Coverage Area from the Fields dialog. click Edit. select 0 decimal place. Select Header and Blank line. select Number. The Minimum Sprinklers calculated value is added to the scheduled fields (at the bottom of the list). Enter the formula operator / after Area. 25 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Sorting/Grouping tab. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog.■ ■ ■ ■ Maximum Coverage Area Maximum Spacing Click Calculated Value. 22 Click OK twice. for Sort by. Click OK.

select Minimum Sprinklers. 27 In the drawing area. 274 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . and then click Field Format. select Hidden field. click Edit. On the Formatting tab: ■ ■ ■ ■ For Fields. and select Totals only. verify that Use default settings is selected. At the bottom of the dialog. Under Field formatting. 28 In the Instance Properties dialog. select Grand totals. select Level. For Fields. 26 Click OK 3 times. for Filter by. For Fields. and then select Hidden field. select Sprinkler Zone. The schedule is arranged and sorted as specified. select Level equals Level 2. right-click the schedule.■ ■ ■ ■ Select Header and Blank line. For Then by (second instance). ■ In the Format dialog. 29 In the Schedule Properties dialog. 30 Click OK twice. for Filter. and click View Properties. select Number.

Create an embedded schedule 35 Right-click the schedule. Group schedule columns 31 In the drawing area. 37 In the Schedule Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ On the Embedded Schedule tab. ■ ■ ■ 38 Click OK 3 times. and click View Properties. select Calculate totals. and enter Maximum Sprinkler Spacing and Area Coverage. 33 Click in the grouped header cell. On the Sorting/Grouping tab. delete the word Maximum. 34 In the Maximum Coverage Area column and in the Maximum Spacing column. and Count. under Other. 36 In the Instance Properties dialog. and then click Embedded Schedule Properties. System Name. For Category. click Edit. On the Fields tab of the Schedule Properties dialog. 32 Click Modify Schedule/Quantities tab ➤ Schedule panel ➤ Headers: Group. and select Totals only. select Embedded Schedule. select Count. for Available fields. select Grand totals. for Embedded Schedule. use click and drag to select the last 4 schedule column headers. Under Field formatting. for Fields. select Sprinklers. double-click Type. On the Formatting tab. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 275 .The schedule is filtered to show only zones on level 2.

43 Click Cancel. but their values are not determined. Notice also that the Maximum Spacing and Maximum Coverage Area parameters that you created are listed under Fire Protection. 42 In the Instance Properties dialog. and click Modify Spaces tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. 46 With the space still selected. for Protection Area Construction Type. 47 In the Instance Properties dialog. 41 In the plan view. double-click FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . under Identity Data. Unobstructed. The parameter change is evident in the schedule. 40 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile to tile the floor plan and the Sprinkler Schedule. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. select Ordinary. When you change editable entries in the schedule to modify your system. Notice that the selection you made in the schedule displays in the dialog. 52 Click OK. click in the floor plan to make it the active view. select space 221 Instruction. This digital database information source is the central concept of Building Information Modeling (BIM).Fire Protection Plan Design. As a result. 50 Access the instance properties. 276 | Chapter 11 Planning a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT A schedule in Revit MEP is not only a construction document but also a design tool. 44 In the schedule. use a selection box to select the upper half of the building. and the spacing parameter values are evident. you are actually editing information in a database of building information. select Ordinary. under Identity Data. Unobstructed. each change is dynamic and immediately propagates throughout your project. 45 For Protection Area Construction Type.Modify space properties from the schedule 39 In the Project Browser. and click OK. 51 In the Instance Properties dialog. notice that there is nothing specified for Protection Area Construction Type. for Protection Area Construction Type. and access the instance properties. 48 In the floor plan. select Light. 49 Filter the selection for spaces only. select space 221 Instruction.

53 Close the file with or without saving it. Creating a Sprinkler Design Schedule | 277 .

278 .

methodology. At the end of this tutorial. By following the recommended workflow. and specific techniques for designing fire protection systems in Revit MEP. you create a wet fire protection system using a linked architectural model of a building project.FP_Ceiling to make it the active view. you follow a series of exercises that teach the recommended systems design workflow for Autodesk Revit MEP 2010.rvt. Adding Sprinklers In this exercise.autodesk. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project.Designing a Fire Protection System 12 In this tutorial. 279 . expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . You can search this directory to verify that the training files have been downloaded. each exercise is dependent on the completion of the previous exercise. The training files that you use to complete this tutorial are located in the Training Files ➤ Imperial directory. you place host-based sprinklers in a ceiling plan view. In the left pane of the Open dialog. However. This training file includes the work from the previous exercise(s) and ensures a seamless training session. The goal of this tutorial is to teach you to create a fire protection system using Autodesk Revit MEP 2010. you will learn various methods to quickly and precisely place sprinklers into the ceiling plan. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_01_i. As you create the system. you learn the best practices for designing systems with Revit MEP.Design ➤ Ceiling Plans. go to http://www. As you place the sprinklers. NOTE All exercises in this tutorial are designed to be completed sequentially. and double-click Level 2 . click Training Files. it is highly recommended that you always begin an exercise by opening the provided training file. you will understand the process. you can choose to save your work. After finishing each exercise. You will use the sprinkler schedule that you created in a previous exercise as a design guide for sprinkler placement. If the tutorial training files are not present. Place host-based sprinklers 1 In the Project Browser.com/revitmep-documentation and download them. hosted to the linked architectural ceiling family.

280 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . IMPORTANT The alignment of sprinklers is critical and will affect the conversion of a layout path to physical piping in later exercises. 6 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. there is insufficient space between the 2 branches to place fittings and the conversion will fail. When this happens. 3 In the Project Browser. and arrange the views so that they are tiled horizontally. the layout path feature will attempt to create separate piping paths to the sprinklers. Sprinklers should either be aligned to each other or sufficiently separated to allow space for fittings. After placing the initial sprinkler. When there is a small misalignment. This action aligns sprinklers so that the piping layout is more efficient. open Schedules/Quantities ➤ Sprinkler Schedule.2 Zoom in to the spaces in the lower right corner of the building. 5 Click in the ceiling plan to make it the active view. you copy and array sprinklers referencing the intersection of ceiling grids. 4 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ Tile.

Semi-Recessed Hosted : 1/2" Pendent from the Type Selector drop-down. Adding Sprinklers | 281 . and select Sprinkler . You can use the Minimum Sprinklers column in the schedule as guidance when you design the fire protection system.Pendent . because it calculates the number of sprinklers needed for each space and the maximum distance between sprinklers. 9 In space Instruction 202. and click to place 3 sprinklers. while pressing Ctrl. 10 Press Esc twice. place the cursor over the approximate center of the ceiling tiles. Continue placing sprinklers You copy the existing sprinklers to place other sprinklers in spaces 203 and 204. select the sprinklers that you placed. Notice that the sprinkler schedule updates to show the sprinklers you added in space 202. because the schedule indicates that each of those spaces requires a minimum of 3 sprinklers.7 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel. 11 In the drawing area. as shown. 8 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Placement panel ➤ Place on Face to place the sprinkler on the ceiling tile face.

Copies of the sprinklers are placed after you specify the end point. Next. 15 Select points in the 2 spaces to the left. 13 On the Options Bar. and then press Esc. Notice that a border displays to indicate the copy selection. and that Copy and Multiple are selected. 282 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . verify that Constrain is cleared.12 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. as shown. Also. 14 Select the upper left corner near the copy selection as the copy start point. the cursor changes to indicate that the Copy tool is active. you place non-hosted sprinklers.

20 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Sprinkler. and then tile the floor plan and schedule views horizontally. 27 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ Clear Group And Associate. You place the system components based on the design requirements (sprinkler count and spacing) indicated in the schedule. 200B. move the cursor to the right.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . Because the sprinkler is not hosted. indicating that the design requirements for the corridor spaces have been met.FP_Ceiling view. for Offset. 28 Click the center of the existing sprinkler as the start point. 18 Type WT. it’s added to the space at an offset of 0' 0". enter 10' 6". click to place a sprinkler at the beginning of the corridor as shown. 24 In the Instance Properties dialog. 22 In the 200A Corridor space. 16 Close the ceiling plan view. 29 Press Esc. you place non-hosted sprinklers. and then click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. specify a vertical offset. it must be positioned above the piping to which it will be connected. and click Element Properties. Array sprinklers 26 With the sprinkler still selected. Because this is an upright sprinkler with its connector facing down. This specifies an elevation for the sprinkler that makes it visible in the Level 2 . enter 14' 6". click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Array. 23 Right-click the sprinkler. open Design ➤ FP . by adding the minimum number of sprinklers for the 3 corridor spaces combined. Adding Sprinklers | 283 . 17 In the Project Browser. and array the sprinklers in the 3 spaces that comprise the Corridor (200A. you adjust the offset. and select Sprinkler-Upright : 1/2" Upright from the Type Selector drop-down. 19 In the floor plan. This number is determined in the schedule. 21 Click Place Sprinkler tab ➤ Element panel.Design. zoom in to the entire wing in the lower right of the building. enter 11. Notice that the schedule updates.Fire Protection Plan . under Constraints. 25 Click OK. and 200C).Place non-hosted sprinklers In this section. For Number. and press Enter. Next.

A system is the logical connection between system components such as sprinklers. indicating that it’s the active view. Then you simplify the layout using Modify tools from the Generate Layout tab on the ribbon to modify pipe branches prior to converting the layout to piping. Unlike logical connections (systems). you connect the sprinklers by creating a system (logical connection). piping is necessary to perform calculations that reference the physical pipe geometry such as sizing. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP . In the left pane of the Open dialog. Creating a Piping System In this exercise. This logical connection allows Revit MEP to perform various analyses including flow and pressure. physical connections (piping) are not required for systems designing. IMPORTANT All system components are logically connected either by a system that you create or by a default system.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . you create a wet sprinkler system and add piping to connect the sprinklers that you placed. In this exercise.30 Close the file with or without saving it.rvt. click Training Files. and with piping (physical connection). and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_02_i.Design is highlighted. 284 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . This is the recommended workflow or best practice for systems creation in Revit MEP. you placed 2 types of sprinklers using various placement methods. 1 In the Project Browser. you use the Layout Path tools to create the initial layout for the piping. After creating the logical connection. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. In the next exercise. and then creating the logical connection between these system components. However. You create fire protection systems by placing sprinklers.Fire Protection Plan .

all of the selected sprinklers have been moved from the Default Fire Protection Wet folder to the new system folder. they are moved from the Unassigned folder to their respective assigned system folder. 8 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Create Systems panel ➤ Fire Protection Wet to create a fire protection wet system. IMPORTANT System components that you place are initially located under a default system category in the Unassigned folder. The wet system that logically connects the sprinklers displays in red to indicate that the new system is selected. within the Piping Systems folder. as shown. Keep the System Browser open and refer to it as you create systems. In the System Browser. 5 Right-click the header. click View ➤ Systems. This occurs because each system component must be assigned to a system after it is placed in order to perform calculations such as flow. Connect sprinklers with a system 7 Draw a selection box (from left to right) around the sprinklers in the office spaces. and assign the selected sprinklers to it. It does not indicate a pipe layout path.2 Zoom in to the wing at the lower right of the building. Explore the System Browser 3 Click Analyze tab ➤ System Browser panel ➤ System Browser. As you assign sprinklers to systems. Creating a Piping System | 285 . 6 Expand the Unassigned ➤ Default Fire Protection Wet 1 system to view the level 2 sprinklers that you placed in the building. 4 Drag the System Browser so that it docks at the bottom of the drawing area. The Fire Protection Wet system is created and listed in the System Browser. and select Piping. named Fire Protection Wet.

■ ■ NOTE The branch offset allows you to automatically create branches that run above or below the main and other obstacles. you use the System Browser to confirm and validate the system. 12 On the Options Bar. Revit MEP uses these settings to convert the preview layout path to physical piping. system equipment. for System Name. double-click the Fire Protection Wet 1 system listing to view the list of sprinklers. enter FP Wet_Zone2. expand Fire Protection Wet ➤ FP Wet_Zone2 to see the included sprinklers. and a piping layout preview displays. NOTE The Generate Layout feature is available whenever a system component is selected. providing system editing tools. 19 Click OK. Confirm and validate the system 9 In the System Browser. select Branch. and number of elements in the system. The selected fire protection wet system highlights in red. 17 Click Generate Layout tab ➤ Generate Layout panel ➤ Solutions. You can now view the fire protection system hierarchy: the Fire Protection Wet 1 system logically connects the sprinklers. In the left pane. indicating the logical connection. 11 With the system still selected. you create piping to physically connect the sprinklers. Verify that the above pipe type and offset settings are the same for Branch. and select the system. and click Select. place the cursor over a sprinkler. TIP If you click in the drawing area and the red system display clears. select a sprinkler that belongs to FP Wet_Zone2. click Settings. This offset elevation places the pipe main at 9 feet above level 2. For Offset. Notice that the Options Bar allows you to verify or modify the system name. Create the initial layout The Layout Paths tools let you specify a source for the system. verify that Main is selected. click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. The Generate Layout tools are activated. press Tab. 13 In the System Browser. verify that 9' 0" is specified. and make preliminary modifications to simplify the piping layout. verify that Pipe Types: Fire Protection .Wet is selected. 15 In the drawing area. 14 Click Finish Editing System. 16 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. and on the Options Bar.Now that the sprinklers are logically connected. Next. The Edit Piping System panel displays. For Pipe Type. 18 In the Pipe Conversion Settings dialog: ■ ■ ■ In the left pane. 10 Right-click Fire Protection Wet 1. 286 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . select an initial piping layout. You also verify the pipe conversion settings that you configured earlier in this tutorial.

The base component provides a source for the fire protection system. select 2". for Diameter. and green represents branch lines). enter -12' 0". click Place Base. and select solution 5. When the layout is finished. 23 For Offset.20 On the Generate Layout panel. In general. 22 On the Options Bar. 25 On the Options Bar: ■ ■ For Solution Type. verify that Network is selected. Use the arrow keys to view all the solutions. these settings will convert the base component to a 2" riser that extends from the bottom of Level 1 up to the connection with the level 2 sprinklers (9' 0"). The layout path solution displays (blue represents the main piping run. Modify the layout 26 You use the Modify tool to customize and simplify the layout. (elbow control) Creating a Piping System | 287 . click Solutions. the method for moving segments in a layout depends on the type of connection between a branch and the main piping: ■ Use (parallel movement control) to move the branch when an displays at the junction. 24 On the Generate Layout panel. as shown. 21 Click in the upper right corner of the stairwell to place the base component. The main piping preview connects to the base component in the stairwell.

On the Generate Layout panel. 29 Click Finish Layout. A (parallel movement control) displays. This pipe run physically connects the wet system sprinklers for the 3 offices on level 2. First drag the tee or cross junction control to the desired location. 288 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . All of the fittings required to connect the pipes to the system components are automatically generated. 28 Drag the parallel movement control up to a point between the office/corridor walls and the corridor sprinklers. as shown. The pipe run geometry (main and branches) is created. and then drag the (elbow junction control) to merge the piping preview.■ Move each end separately when either a (tee junction control) or (cross junction control) displays at the junction. click Modify. 27 Select the horizontal layout path segment connecting to the base point.

The most common causes of these errors are that there is insufficient space to create a pipe or a fitting. or manually modify the pipe.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. you complete the wet system by adding the remaining sprinklers to the FP Wet_Zone2 system using the Layout Path tool. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 289 . and various manual pipe creation tools. Either relocate the system components. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System In this exercise. You add the remaining sprinklers to the current wet system to logically connect them. View the system in 3D 30 Open FP . 33 Close the file with or without saving it. the Connect Into tool. and then you create piping to physically connect them. 32 If necessary. or that offset elevations are incorrect. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. you complete the level 2 wet fire protection system. Next. 31 Zoom in to the area with the sprinkler system. select a different layout solution.IMPORTANT Errors may occur when you attempt to create pipe geometry during layout path conversion or pipe sizing.

and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_03_i. 3 If necessary. 4 Click the left plus sign to upgrade the fitting to a tee.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .rvt. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select the elbow fitting as shown.Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 .Fire Protection Plan . 1 In the Project Browser. indicating that it’s the active view. 290 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . click Training Files. click View tab ➤ Graphics panel ➤ Thin Lines. 2 Zoom in.Design is highlighted.

verify that Network is selected. 9 On the Edit System panel. you can select the pipe or duct. 11 On the Generate Layout panel. 16 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System. IMPORTANT After system components (sprinklers. mechanical equipment. click Add To System. 14 Close the System Browser. This allows you to modify the system (logical connection). draw a selection box from lower left to upper right around the sprinklers as shown (don’t include the last 3 sprinklers). for Solution Type. System tools display on the Piping Systems tab. 12 On the Options Bar. and select solution 5. or a system component to display system tools. and so on) are logically connected by a system. The layout automatically creates a path connecting to the tee created earlier. Notice that the number of system elements updates on the Options Bar. and pipe or duct is created. Add remaining sprinklers to FP Wet_Zone2 system 15 In the drawing area.The tee provides an open connector that will serve as a base when laying out the piping for the sprinklers in the corridor. 6 Click Piping Systems tab ➤ System Tools panel ➤ Edit System so that you can add sprinklers to the system. 18 Click Finish Editing System. radiators. click Finish Editing System. You can confirm the sprinkler system assignment in the floor plan view or in the System Browser. verify that Solutions is selected. select any sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. and click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Generate Layout. 7 On the Edit Piping System panel. 5 In the drawing area. air terminals. 17 Use a selection box to select the remaining 3 sprinklers. The selected sprinklers are assigned to FP Wet_Zone2. Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 291 . select a sprinkler that is part of the FP Wet_Zone2 system. Connect the sprinklers with pipe 19 Zoom to the 3 spaces at the right end of the corridor. 13 Click Finish Layout. 10 Select a sprinkler in the corridor. 8 In the corridor.

24 In the Piping Plan. pan and zoom to the next unconnected sprinkler. 25 Select the sprinkler. click the intersection with the horizontal main pipe as the pipe endpoint. Notice that horizontal and vertical segments of pipe were added. 27 On the Options Bar. 29 Using the same method. and select the horizontal segment of main piping as shown. 292 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. draw pipe from the last unconnected sprinkler to the main pipe. right-click. and click Draw Pipe. and then press Esc.20 Open Design ➤ FP . 23 View the result in the 3D view. and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection . and then tile the views. and select the leftmost unconnected sprinkler. select 9'. 26 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel. for Offset. 28 In the drawing area. 22 Click Modify Sprinklers tab ➤ Layout panel ➤ Connect Into.Design ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Fire Protection. zoom in to the corridor above the spaces that have piping. 21 In the Piping Plan.

Completing the Fire Protection Wet System | 293 .Layout in 2D Layout in 3D Verify connectivity 30 Close the 3D view. 32 Use the cursor to highlight a section of the pipe. 33 Close the file with or without saving it. zoom so that you can see the entire wing with the fire protection system. and press Tab twice to highlight the entire system. 31 In the plan view. Because the whole system highlights. it’s a visual indication that all components are connected correctly.

double-click on the section head to open the section view. 4 On the Options Bar. 294 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . 2 Zoom to the offices in the lower right corner. 5 Draw the section: ■ In the drawing area. You also place a hose reel cabinet in the building and connect it to the supply standpipe.Design is highlighted. and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_04_i.Fire Protection Plan .Adding Vertical Supply Piping In this exercise. click Training Files. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click at the staircase to specify the section line endpoint. Specify section properties 7 In the drawing area. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Section.rvt. you create a section view that you will use to work with vertical piping. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP .Design ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 2 . click outside the corridor wall at the stairs to specify the section line start point. select 1/4" = 1'-0". for Scale. ■ 6 Press Esc. indicating that it’s the active view. Create a section view 1 In the Project Browser. In the left pane of the Open dialog.

8 Right-click, and click View Properties. 9 In the Instance Properties dialog:
■ ■ ■ ■ ■

Under Graphics, for Sub-Discipline, select FP - Design. For View Classification, select Design. Under Identity Data, for View Name, enter FP Section_Stair. For Default View Template, select MEP Section. Click OK.

10 In the Project Browser, right-click Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ Sections ➤ FP Section_Stair, and click Apply Default View Template. 11 Zoom to the top near the horizontal pipe. 12 If necessary, drag the top section boundary line up. 13 Select the elbow fitting, and then click the top + grip to upgrade the elbow fitting to a tee. 14 Select the tee fitting, and then right-click the top connector, and click Draw Pipe. 15 Press Spacebar. 16 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Element panel, and select Pipe Types: Fire Protection - Wet from the Type Selector drop-down. 17 Move the cursor up, enter 7', and press Enter.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 295

18 Click Place Pipe tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 19 Make Level 2 - Fire Protection Plan - Design the active view. Add mechanical equipment 20 Click Home tab ➤ Mechanical panel ➤ Mechanical Equipment. 21 Click Place Mechanical Equipment tab ➤ Element panel, and select M_Hose Reel Cabinet Surface Mounted : 1"25mm from the drop-down list. 22 In the drawing area, click on the wall (host face) near the stairs to place the cabinet as shown, and then click Modify.

23 In the section view, zoom to the hose reel cabinet. 24 Select the cabinet, right-click the connector on the left of the cabinet, and click Draw Pipe.

296 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

25 Verify that Fire Protection - Wet is selected from the Type Selector drop-down. 26 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 2"50mm. 27 On the Placement Tools panel, verify that Automatically Connect is active. 28 Connect to the vertical pipe (using the Intersection and Horizontal snaps), and then click Modify.

29 Close the section view. Add a valve 30 Click Home tab ➤ Plumbing & Piping panel ➤ Pipe Accessory. 31 In the alert dialog, click Yes to load a family. 32 In the Open dialog, navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Gate Valve - 2-12 Inch.rfa, and click Open. 33 In the Type Selector, verify that Gate Valve - 2" is selected. 34 Select the midpoint of the horizontal pipe that extends from the cabinet, as shown, and then click Modify.

Adding Vertical Supply Piping | 297

A 2" gate valve is placed in the 2" diameter pipe.

35 Open 3D Fire Protection, and zoom in to the cabinet to see the valve in 3D.

36 Close the file with or without saving it.

298 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modifying Pipe Diameters
In this exercise, you modify the diameter of the pipes so that the pipes are a better fit with the design specifications. Because the pipe diameters depend on the number of sprinklers, you also create a sprinkler schedule to report the number of level 2 sprinklers. Training File
■ ■

Click

➤ Open ➤ Project.

In the left pane of the Open dialog, click Training Files, and open Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\RME_FP_Design_05_i.rvt.

Tile the views 1 In the Project Browser, expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ FP - Design ➤ 3D Views, and double-click 3D Fire Protection to make it the active view. 2 Enter WT to tile the 3D and floor plan views, and arrange them so that they’re tiled horizontally. 3 Adjust the view in both windows to view the entire fire protection pipe run as shown. You will work primarily in the floor plan view and validate the pipe geometry in the 3D view.

NOTE It is important to recognize the distinction between sizing and manually changing the diameter, height, or width. Changing the diameter, width, or height of pipe on the Options Bar is not considered sizing in Revit MEP. Sizing is performed using the Sizing tool (Sizing dialog) to size the pipe based on a series of parameters and calculations. The calculated size of a pipe is the result of the Sizing tool and not the result of a manual change of diameter, width, or height. Modify the diameter of the fire protection pipe run The majority of the pipe segments service no more than 2 sprinklers, and because the design specifications require a 1 inch diameter for pipes servicing 2 sprinklers, it’s more efficient to specify 1 inch diameter for all pipe runs, and then adjust branches servicing more than 2 sprinklers separately. 4 In the floor plan view, starting at the lower left corner of the wing, draw a selection box around the level 2 fire protection piping until just past the section line (don’t include the supply pipe or hose reel cabinet).

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 299

5 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Filter panel ➤ Filter. 6 In the Filter dialog, click Check None, select Pipe Fittings and Pipes, and click OK. 7 On the Options Bar, for Diameter, select 1". 8 Click Modify. All selected piping is now 1" diameter.

Tag the pipes 9 In the floor plan view, zoom in to the right half of the wing (including the stairs). 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 11 Click to select a segment of pipe in the corridor. 12 If necessary, click Yes to load tags in the alert dialog, . 13 Navigate to Training\Imperial\05_Fire Protection Systems\Pipe Size Tag.rfa, and click Open. 14 On the Options Bar:
■ ■

Verify that Horizontal is selected. Clear Leader.

15 Place the cursor over the pipe segments shown, and after each segment highlights, click to place the tag. The tags accurately display the size of the selected pipe segments.

NOTE Tags are view specific. They display only in the view in which they were placed. Press Esc.

300 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System

Modify the diameter of the main 16 In the 3D view, select the linked architectural file. 17 On the View Control Bar, click Temporary Hide/Isolate ➤ Hide Category. By hiding the linked file, you isolate the piping to make it easier to select. 18 In the 3D view, select the vertical pipe below the hose cabinet.

19 Place the cursor over the section of main pipe feeding the last sprinkler, and when the section highlights, press Tab. This highlights the piping between the vertical pipe and the last segement. 20 Click to select the main piping between these points. The main piping is selected and displays in red.

Modifying Pipe Diameters | 301

302 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System .21 On the Options Bar. select 4". for Diameter. The diameter of the fire protection main piping changes.

25 On the Options Bar. and then tag the piping as shown. Modifying Pipe Diameters | 303 . select the top segment of branch pipe in space Instruction 202 (next to the stairs). and maximize the floor plan. select 1 1/4". The pipe diameter is modified. as shown.22 Click in the floor plan to make it the active view. 23 Close the 3D view. 26 Using the same method. change the diameter of the other top segments to 1 1/4" to accommodate sprinklers. for Diameter. 24 In the drawing area. Modify the diameter of branch pipes The number of sprinklers serviced by a branch determines the pipe size used for that branch.

In this tutorial. You also learned the difference between creating rigid physical pipe connections and creating logical systems. Use the same system components and parameters as you did for level 2. Feel free to modify the systems or create entirely new fire protection systems. Explore different system designs and discover the power of Revit MEP. allowing you to immediately verify the pipe diameters. you created a wet fire protection system. 28 Close the file with or without saving it. The pipe run now complies with the design criteria. and the difference between how the software sizes pipe and how to manually modify pipe diameter. You learned how to manually change the diameter of a pipe.27 This completes the Fire Protection tutorial. 304 | Chapter 12 Designing a Fire Protection System . You added tags to pipes.rvt file located in the Imperial ➤ 05_Fire Protection Systems folder under Training Files. The completed fire protection system is included in the RME_FP_Design_06_i. For additional practice. In this exercise. use the methods that you learned and create the level 1 fire protection wet system. you used various selection methods to modify the level 2 fire protection pipe run diameters.

add annotations and dimensions. you learn how to use Autodesk Revit MEP 2010 to create views. create details.Documenting a Project In this tutorial. 305 . and create schedules for construction documentation for a project.

306 .

matchlines. right-click Copy of Level 1. You then change the properties of the new view by applying a view template. In the left pane of the Open dialog. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. under Floor Plans. If the view included detail graphics. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. Apply a view template 4 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicate the Level 1 floor plan to create a Level 1 duct plan 1 In the Project Browser. Duplicating Plan Views In this exercise. you’d select Duplicate with Detailing.Design ➤ Floor Plans. and click OK. You select Duplicate because only model elements are included in the original view. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_01_i. and click Rename. you duplicate an existing floor plan view to create a duct plan view.rvt. and click Properties. click Training Files. You learn to create: ■ ■ ■ ■ a duplicate plan view. a plumbing isometric riser from a 3D design view. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC . right-click Level 1. you begin the construction documentation for the building project. and view references. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. dependent views. and apply a view template.Creating Documentation Views 13 In this lesson. 2 In the Project Browser. 307 . callout views for a typical HVAC view and a detail view.

more focused. under Identity Data ➤ Default View Template. 308 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 2 Right-click the dependent view title. You can modify the visibility of matchlines in specific views. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and click OK. In the left pane of the Open dialog. select HVAC Duct Plan-Documentation. enter Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. verify that the top and bottom constraints are Unlimited.rvt. 10 In the drawing area. 6 Click View tab ➤ Sheet Composition panel ➤ Matchline. and click OK. 9 Click OK. 4 Using the same method. Dependent views keep the primary/parent view as the working drawing and allow you to create smaller. and then press Esc. 3 In the Rename View dialog. Duplicate a view to create dependent views 1 In the Project Browser. 6 In the Project Browser. and click Rename. as shown. to delineate splits in a large floor plan. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate as a Dependent. 11 Click beyond the exterior wall of the wing to specify the second point. click Training Files.5 In the Instance Properties dialog. The smaller (dependent) views inherit view properties and view-specific elements from the primary view. Create matchlines Matchlines are used with dependent views. This is useful when breaking up plans with varying geometries across levels. 8 In the Instance Properties dialog. you use dependent views to accommodate such large buildings. create dependent views for areas B and C. and click Apply Default View Template. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_02_i. and the floor plan is moved to its new location in the Project Browser hierarchy. views and put them on the sheet. The view is automatically updated with the defined graphical style. click to specify the first point of the matchline to the left of the plan and below gridline C. Creating Dependent Views Because large buildings cannot fit on a single sheet at 1/8" = 1' scale. 7 Click Create Matchline Sketch tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Matchline Properties. right-click Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 5 Make sure Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is the active view. You crop a dependent view to show only the area marked by the matchline. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan.

Modify object styles 15 Zoom in to the left part of the upper matchline. 14 Click Finish Matchline. apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B to the other view reference. select Matchline: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ For Line Color. on the Options Bar. 17 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog. and then press Esc. for Target view. For Line Pattern. select Floor Plan: Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. 16 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. and click OK. select Double Dash 5/8". 13 Press Esc twice. Creating Dependent Views | 309 . select 11. 20 Select the upper view reference and. Click OK. click above and below the modified matchline to create view references (displayed as .12 Draw a second matchline that spans the floor plan above gridline H. In the Color dialog. 19 In the drawing area. Creating view references 18 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ View Reference. click the current value. select black. For Line Weight./ ---). 21 Using the same method.

28 Make Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan the active view. Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_B Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C 26 Open Sheet M201. and drag Plan_A from the Project Browser onto the sheet. as shown. The view references in the primary view are automatically updated as the views are placed on sheets. indicating the detail and sheet number of each view.22 Add a view reference below the lower matchline. 24 Use the grips on the crop lines to modify the view boundaries. 23 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_A. drag Plan_B onto Sheet M202 and Plan_C onto Sheet M203. crop the dependent views for plans B and C. and zoom to each of the view references. 25 Using the same method. 27 Using the same method. and apply Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan_C to it. 310 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views .

Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser In this exercise. 6 In the Project Browser. 5 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data.29 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. press Tab twice to highlight the pipe run. click Training Files. Duplicate a view and specify properties 1 In the Project Browser. Under Graphics. enter Plumbing Isometric . select Plumbing Isometric. and click Properties. Click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_03_i. The section crop lines no longer display. right-click Copy of 3D Plumbing.Domestic Water. 2 Zoom in. right-click 3D Plumbing. for View Name. for View Classification. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 311 . For Default View Template. 8 Highlight a segment of the top horizontal piping. right-click Plumbing Isometric . 3 Click Modify Section Boxes tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and click Apply Default View Template.rvt.Domestic Water. and click to select it. For Sub-Discipline. select Plumbing. under Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ Plumbing-Design ➤ 3D Views. 4 In the Project Browser. You pin the view to keep it from being moved inadvertently. select Documentation. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 7 Zoom in to the plumbing system. you copy a 3D design view and modify it to create a 3D plumbing isometric riser for domestic water. and select the section box.

and click to select it. 12 Using the same method. change the line weight to 4 and the line pattern to Dash Dot 3/16".9 Right-click. 10 In the View-Specific Element Graphics dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Weight. 11 Select the vertical segment of pipe coming off the tankless water heater. For Pattern. press Tab 3 times. and click Override Graphics in View ➤ By Element. and then click OK. Click Apply. 312 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . The selected piping displays as a dashed line. select 3. select Dash.

This hides the sanitary piping in order to create a domestic water supply riser isometric view. as shown). 14 Right-click. press Tab 3 times (until the entire pipe network highlights. Creating a Plumbing Isometric Riser | 313 .13 Highlight a segment of horizontal pipe below the sinks. and click to select it. and click Hide in View ➤ Elements.

Sanitary Waste. and then click in empty space in the drawing to end the label. Click in the drawing area to start a text label. 16 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. click Close Reveal Hidden Elements. and rename the new view Plumbing Isometric . On the View Control Bar. Unhide the sanitary waste piping: ■ ■ ■ ■ On the View Control Bar. click Model Graphics Style ➤ Wireframe. Right-click. highlight a segment of the sanitary piping. click Reveal Hidden Elements. ■ ■ ■ Hide domestic cold water and domestic hot water piping. create a sanitary riser isometric view: ■ Duplicate the Plumbing Isometric . and click to select it. 17 Label the fixtures as shown. In the drawing area.15 Press Esc. 18 Using methods learned previously.Domestic Water view with detailing. press Tab 3 times. and click Unhide in view ➤ Elements. 314 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . On the View Control Bar.

select To the nearest 1/8". Creating Callout Views In this exercise. 25 Press Esc twice. you use a plan view to create a callout view. 23 Click on the horizontal pipe below the sinks to select it. When the view is associated with a sheet. 26 Close the file with or without saving it. 24 Move the cursor above the pipe. Creating Callout Views | 315 . the callout head on the original view is updated with the sheet information. 22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Spot Slope. click on the Format value. 20 In the Project Units dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Discipline. and then place the callout view on a sheet. for Rounding. and click to place the spot slope annotation. verify that Common is selected. as shown.Add a spot slope annotation 19 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Project Units. In the Format dialog. For Slope. 21 Click OK twice.

for Scale. In the left pane of the Open dialog.rvt. 2 Zoom in to an office in Area C (the bottom section of the plan). 4 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 6 Draw the callout around the ductwork as shown. 3 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. click Training Files. 7 Modify the callout leader: ■ ■ Select the callout boundary. and move it to the bottom right corner of the boundary. 316 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . select 1/4"=1'-0''.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan is highlighted. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Views_04_i. Select the Drag Head control (the control on the leader line that is closest to the callout head). 5 On the Options Bar. indicating that it’s the active view. and select Floor Plan from the Type Selector drop-down. Create a floor plan callout 1 In the Project Browser. beginning at the upper left and ending at the lower right.

Creating Callout Views | 317 . 11 On the Annotation Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ For the Callout Boundary category. and click in the empty space at the top center to place it. Modify callout boundary line weight 9 Press Esc to clear the selection.8 Create an angled leader line by dragging the Drag control located at the center of the leader as shown. using the same method. drag it to the sheet.HVAC Duct Plan & Sections. for Line Weight. double-click M601 . select Callout of Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 13 In the Project Browser. ■ Expand the Callout Boundary category and. 10 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. select 5. Click OK. change the line weight for the Callout Leader Line to 5. ■ Place the view on a sheet 12 In the Project Browser. under Sheets (all).

For Default View Template. and select the viewport. Ductwork in coarse detail 318 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 17 In the Project Browser. The display of the ductwork changes from coarse detail to fine. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Identity Data. enter Callout of Level 1 HVAC WSHP TYP. right-click the callout view.Rename the detail view and modify view settings 14 Zoom to the callout view. For Title on Sheet. and click Apply Default View Template. 15 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. Click OK. for View Name. enter WSHP PART PLAN.

The detail callout head has been updated with sheet information.Ductwork in fine detail Create a detail callout 18 Open Level 1 HVAC Duct Plan. 19 Zoom in to the area near the central stairs and section markers. Creating Callout Views | 319 . 20 Double-click the section head at the left of the stairs to open Room 214 Section.

and click OK. 23 Draw the callout boundary around the level 1 ductwork as shown. 22 Click Callout tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Close the file with or without saving it. and click OK. 320 | Chapter 13 Creating Documentation Views . 26 In the Rename View dialog. and select Detail from the Type Selector drop-down. under Names. expand Views (Discipline) ➤ Design ➤ HVAC .21 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Callout. 27 Right-click Typical WSHP Detail. 24 Double-click the callout head to open the detail view. select HVAC Duct Detail-Documentation. 25 In the Project Browser. right-click the detail view. 28 In the Apply View Template dialog. enter Typical WSHP Detail. and click Rename. and click Apply View Template. The view is changed to a hidden line display and is moved to its new position in the Project Browser hierarchy.Design ➤ Detail Views (Detail).

■ work with model-based components. and diffuser tags to an HVAC documentation plan. you learn how to: ■ add text notes. and annotation to create a legend. 321 . linetypes. ■ create permanent dimensions in a lighting plan so that you can control the location of specific fixtures. symbols. duct tags.Working with Annotations and Dimensions 14 In this lesson.

Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. 8 With the text still selected. 322 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Add a text note to an HVAC documentation plan 1 In the Project Browser. 5 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Center). use the drag grips to modify the text box width and position it so that it doesn’t cross the ductwork or wall. 2 Zoom in to the offices in the lower right corner of the building in Area C. click Training Files.rvt. you work with tag and leader types to create an annotated HVAC documentation plan. as shown. 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. 7 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and enter RUN DUCT THROUGH OPEN WEB JOISTS.Creating Annotations In this exercise. under Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ Floor Plans. 4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. double-click Level 2 HVAC Duct Plan to make it the active view. 6 Click to start the text note in between 2 of the branch ducts serving the perimeter supply air grilles. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_01_i.

Creating Annotations | 323 . as shown. verify that Leader is cleared. a segment of round duct. Use the leader segment grips to create horizontal leader segments from the text box. 12 Use the leader end grips to drag the arrows to point to the 2 branch ducts. a return diffuser. 13 Press Esc to clear the selection. 11 Click Modify Text Notes tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Add Leader: Left Straight. 15 On the Options Bar. Add diffuser and duct tags by category 14 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. select a supply diffuser. and then click Right Straight. 16 In the drawing area. Add leaders 10 Select the text box. and a segment of rectangular duct.9 Press Esc twice.

tag the remaining diffusers in the area. and click OK. 23 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 24 On the Options Bar. 324 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .rfa and Flex Duct Tag Round. 17 Click Modify. Tag remaining diffusers 18 Using the same method. select Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. move diffuser tags off the ductwork. clear Leader.The information on each tag varies according to the category of element. navigate to Annotations ➤ Duct. for Ducts. under Category. 21 In the Load Family dialog. you can annotate the element with a second tag type. verify that the Loaded Tag is Bottom Elevation Duct Tag. and click Open. Place a loaded tag and modify its orientation In order to display additional information about an element.rfa. If necessary. click Load. 22 In the Tags dialog. 20 In the Tags dialog. Load tags from library 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel drop-down ➤ Loaded Tags.

select the select the large pipe on the right as shown. 29 Zoom in to the piping near the stairs in the upper right corner of the building in Area A.25 In the drawing area. Leader. select Horizontal. 26 On the Options Bar. 30 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. specify Tag Orientation as Vertical. 31 On the Options Bar. and Attached End. as shown. 32 In the drawing area. open Documentation ➤ HVAC-Pipe ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan ➤ Level 1 HVAC Pipe Plan_A. Creating Annotations | 325 . and then press Esc. Place tags with leaders 28 In the Project Browser. select the large horizontal segment of rectangular duct and the round duct. 27 Select the large segment of rectangular duct connected to the WSHP.

as shown. 35 Click above and to the right of the leader start point to place the leader as shown. for Leader. 34 In the drawing area. 326 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . click the top horizontal pipe in the corridor.33 On the Options Bar. select Free End.

select the last tag placed. for Leader Arrowhead. select Dot Open 1/16". lay out. Notice that the new tags you place use the new style. 37 In the drawing area. not simply an instance property. 38 Click Modify Pipe Tags tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Type Properties. 39 In the Type Properties dialog. Edit a tag type You edit the type properties for the pipe size tag so that you can specify a different leader style. you use temporary dimensions to locate. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. and all elements of that type are affected.36 Press Esc twice. That’s because you changed a type property. and click OK. Creating Dimensions | 327 . and lock lighting fixtures. tag the bottom horizontal pipe as shown. 40 Using the method learned previously. and the tags placed previously have changed to the new style as well. Creating Dimensions In this exercise.

5 Click to create a permanent dimension. 3 Select the upper left lighting fixture. Continue the dimension string using the Edit Witness Lines feature 7 In the drawing area. Lay out lighting fixtures using temporary and permanent dimensions 1 In the Project Browser. 9 Select the reference line at the center of the next fixture to the right. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Lighting ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan ➤ Level 1 Lighting Plan_A is highlighted. 12 Press Esc. 8 Click Modify Dimensions tab ➤ Witness Lines panel ➤ Edit Witness Lines. click Training Files. select the dimension line. 10 Repeat for the remaining 2 top fixtures. 2 Zoom in to the left side of the plan. 11 Click in any empty space in the drawing area to finish. 328 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . In the left pane of the Open dialog. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_02_i. You can modify the preferred condition for dimension face selection. On the Options Bar.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. indicating that it’s the active view. notice that Prefer : Wall faces is selected. 6 Press Esc to clear the selection. 4 Using the Move Witness Line control. and then select the interior face of the wall.rvt. drag the witness line on the right to the face of the wall on the left side of the selected lighting fixture.

linework. Training File ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and press Enter. 18 Select the dimension value (7' . Lock dimensions between fixtures 14 Select the center dimension line. add dimension strings for the remaining 2 rows of lighting fixtures in the room. you create an HVAC Sheet Metal legend using model-based legend components. the fixtures shift to maintain constraints.13 Using the same method. 16 Press Esc. lock the dimensions of the interior fixtures for the remaining 2 rows. 20 Close the file with or without saving it. Because the dimensions are locked. enter 8'. 15 To lock the dimensions between the interior fixtures. Creating a Legend | 329 . click the 3 interior locks on the line. Modify dimensions to offset fixtures 17 Select the right lighting fixture in the center line. 19 Using the same methods. Creating a Legend In this exercise. and notes.3 1/2"). annotation symbols. and offset them 8' from the wall.

4 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. For Scale.8 Neck. Create a legend title 3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Add model element detail components 7 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Legend Component. ■ 9 In the drawing area. For View. 6 Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. 8 On the Options Bar: ■ For Family.Rectangular Face Round Neck : 24x24 . 10 Using the same method. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Annotations_03_i. Create a legend view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Legends drop-down ➤ Legend. select 1/4" = 1' -0". select Floor Plan.Sidewall : 18 x 8 330 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . Click OK. select Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click below the title to place the diffuser. enter Diffuser Legend. 5 Click in the drawing area. place: ■ ■ ■ Air Terminals : Return Diffuser : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Exhaust Grill : 24 x 24 Face 12 x 12 Connection Air Terminals : Supply Diffuser . click Training Files.rvt.■ In the left pane of the Open dialog. and select 1/4" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 2 In the New Legend View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. and enter DIFFUSER LEGEND.

annotate the remaining components: ■ ■ ■ RETURN DIFFUSER EXHAUST GRILL SIDEWALL SUPPLY DIFFUSER 16 Click Modify. and enter SUPPLY DIFFUSER. 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and select 1/8" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down list. Add detail component text descriptions 12 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.11 Press Esc. 14 In the drawing area. 15 Using the same method and using the blue dashed reference lines for alignment. Creating a Legend | 331 . click next to the top diffuser.

332 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions . 18 Select the ELEVATION INCLINE . open HVAC_SM_DUCT_CONDITION legend view. select the top and bottom detail lines on the left side of the component. 19 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. and then click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .DROP symbol to specify the copy end point. select Thin Lines from the Line Style drop-down. The selected detail lines are now thin.Create a legend symbol 17 In the Project Browser. 24 Select the component’s break line. 26 Press Esc. and click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Mirror. 23 Delete the arrow and the left 3 lines at the center of the component.RISE symbol for the copy start point. 29 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Symbol. 21 Press Esc. 25 Select the center reference line as the mirror line. 22 Zoom in to the copied component.DROP and its text note. 28 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 27 While pressing Ctrl. and then press Esc. 20 Click the top left corner of the ELEVATION INCLINE .

30 Select Spot Elevation . 34 Using the method learned previously. and then click Modify. and then click Modify. enter E. in the Ductwork-Sheet Metal column. 36 Click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 31 Click below the center of the bottom component to place the symbol. 35 Change the text on the right to N. Creating a Legend | 333 . 32 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. and then change the text note to CONNECT NEW DUCT TO EXISTING DUCT. Place legend views on a sheet 37 In the Project Browser.MECHANICAL LEGEND. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ M100 . 38 Drag Diffuser Legend from the Project Browser to the bottom of the sheet. mirror the text on the center reference line of the component. 33 Click to the left of the left break line.Target Filled from the Type Selector drop-down.

40 Press Esc. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. 41 Close the file with or without saving it. 334 | Chapter 14 Working with Annotations and Dimensions .39 With the viewport still selected. click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel.

Detailing 15 In this lesson. In the left pane of the Open dialog. 2 Double-click the right elevation head to open the Power Riser . you will create: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ A model-based detail of an electrical power riser diagram. click Training Files. detail groups. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_01_i. you place elevation views on a sheet and then arrange them as a single view in preparation of creating a one-line diagram. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. and text. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail In this exercise. A 3D isometric detail view of a typical WSHP Make Up detail. A detail callout that references another view. A drafting detail by importing a CAD detail. A drafting view using detail components.rvt. indicating that it’s the active view. verify that Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Power ➤ Floor Plans ➤ Level 1 Power Plan ➤ Level 1 Power Plan_B is highlighted.113 East elevation view. Tag electrical panels 1 In the Project Browser. 335 .

113 East on the sheet. Notice that the software displays a dashed line so that you can align the views as you place them. 336 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select each of the 2 panelboards. 5 In the drawing area.Electrical Power Riser Diagram to make it the active view. double-click Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . Next.113 North elevation view from the Project Browser to the empty area at the upper left of sheet E101. you place both the North and East elevation views on a sheet.3 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Tag by Category. 7 Drag the Power Riser . 4 On the Options Bar. Place the view close to the left edge of the sheet so that there is room in the same space for the east elevation view. and click to place it. Place views on a sheet 6 In the Project Browser. place Power Riser . and then modify and align the views. clear Leader. 8 Using the same method.

Modify a viewport title 14 Select the title of the 113 North view. Doing this enables you to later drag the 113 East view to the left. and click Deactivate View. giving the appearance of a single view. Creating a Model-Based Electrical Riser Diagram Detail | 337 . and use the filled circle drag control on the right to drag the end of the level line to the right. and click Activate View. 12 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 North view. right-click. 10 Zoom to the power riser elevations on the sheet. and click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Element Properties drop-down ➤ Instance Properties. and click OK. 15 In the Instance Properties dialog. under Identity Data. Modify level lines 11 In the drawing area. for Title on Sheet.9 Press Esc. 13 Right-click. enter Electrical Power Riser Diagram.

17 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. You combine views in order to create a one-line diagram. Align elevation views to resemble a single view 18 In the drawing area. You also create a detail group and annotate the diagram. 23 Close the file with or without saving it. right-click.Remove a viewport title display 16 Select the 113 East view. move the view to the left so that it overlaps the 113 North view. 338 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Creating Detail Wiring In this exercise. you use detail lines to create wiring for the one-line electrical riser diagram. In the next exercise. 21 Using the drag control. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. 20 Select the 113 East elevation view again. 19 Select the Level 1 line. select the 113 East elevation view. and select No Title from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click. 22 Press Esc. as shown. you add wiring to the diagram. and click Activate View.

In the left pane of the Open dialog. indicating that it’s the active view.Electrical Power Riser Diagram is highlighted. enter Electrical Power. 6 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. Draw linework to create a wiring diagram 5 In the drawing area. 7 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Element panel. 3 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Line Styles. select 6. 9 Beginning at the transformer. 2 Close the Project Browser. verify that Chain is selected. for Line Weight. click Training Files. expand Lines. 8 On the Options Bar. click New. 4 In the Line Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ ■ Under Category. for Name. notice that there are no snaps active.rvt.113 North view. Create a linetype 1 In the Project Browser.Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Under Modify Subcategories. as shown. In the New Subcategory dialog. zoom in to the service transformer (T-SVC) located at the bottom left of the Power Riser . verify that Sheets (all) ➤ E101 . This maximizes the drawing window so that you can more easily add wiring to the riser diagram. and select Electrical Power from the Type Selector drop-down. draw lines to represent the wiring to the switchboard (SWB). In the Line Styles dialog. Creating Detail Wiring | 339 . Zoom in as necessary and use the drag controls to make sure the lines clean up properly. and click OK. and then click OK. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_02_i. As you draw.

for Offset. 11 Using the same method. 12 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. 14 Click to place lines offset to the right and above the first 2 lines from the switchboard. enter 1/8". 340 | Chapter 15 Detailing . as shown. add lines to represent wiring between the switchboard and a panel on level 3 (MDP_3).10 Press Esc. 13 On the Options Bar.

18 Select the vertical detail line that connects into MDP_2 as the first line to trim. 19 Select the horizontal line to the right of the first line.15 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. so that the result is as shown. you select the portion of the line that you want to keep. 17 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. Creating Detail Wiring | 341 . 16 Draw a line to connect the offset line to MDP_2. TIP When you use the Trim tool.

342 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 Zoom in to panel MP-1B.20 Continue adding detail lines until the diagram is wired as shown. and then copy them to multiple locations in the diagram. Add a break symbol and note You create the break symbol and text note once.

23 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Start-End-Radius Arc). and use the drag controls to resize the text box and position it as shown. and type SEE MECHANICAL CONNECTION SCHEDULE. as shown. and then click Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: (Center). 26 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ No Leader. 24 Draw a “cap” (the break symbol) over the 3 vertical lines at the top of the panel. 25 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text. Creating Detail Wiring | 343 . 27 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. 29 Click Modify. The name of the detail arc (Start-End-Radius) indicates the order in which you select the defining points of the arc. 28 Click above the cap. and select 3/32" Arial Transparent from the Type Selector drop-down. Copy the symbol and text 30 Select the text.22 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

344 | Chapter 15 Detailing .31 While pressing Ctrl. select Multiple. 33 On the Options Bar. 32 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 35 Click the endpoint of each of the corresponding lines for the other 2 mechanical panels (MP-2B and MP-3B) as the copy endpoints. 34 Click the endpoint of the left vertical line under the break symbol as the copy start point. select the text and the detail arc of the break symbol.

enter 3/32". and then press Esc. Create a ground wire You use 3 detail lines to create a ground wire symbol. 37 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 43 Click twice to place 2 more lines below the first line. enter 0 0.36 Press Esc. 42 On the Options Bar. 39 Move the cursor to the right. You enter exact values for each line length. 41 Click Modify tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Offset. and press Enter. click to specify the start point of the first horizontal line. for Offset. 38 Beginning below the level 1 switchboard. 40 Press Esc. Creating Detail Wiring | 345 .5.

125. while pressing Ctrl. 45 Click View tab ➤ Windows panel ➤ User Interface drop-down ➤ Project Browser to open the browser view. Press Esc. 50 With the group selected. click on the length dimension value. Notice that the new Ground group displays in the Project Browser. expand Groups ➤ Detail. Using the same method. change the length of the bottom line to 0 0. drag the Modify Group Origin control to the midpoint of the top detail line. 47 In the drawing area. You can also specify the origin point of the group so that it is placed accurately. 49 In the Create Detail Group dialog. 346 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 48 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. and click OK. and then press Esc. 46 In the Project Browser. enter 0 0. for Name. you can ensure that they stay together. Create a detail group By grouping the lines that represent the ground wire. and press Enter. enter Ground. select all 3 lines.25.44 Edit the offset lines: ■ ■ ■ Select the middle line.

draw a detail line that extends from the bottom right of the switchboard. 56 Draw a detail line to connect each ground wire group to its transformer. 55 Click below each of the transformers (TP-1B. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Move. 54 Select the group.51 Using the method learned previously. 52 Select the detail group. Creating Detail Wiring | 347 . and then click the endpoint of the detail line as the move end point. and click Modify Detail Groups tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Similar. 53 Click the origin of the detail group as the move start point. TP-2B. and TP-3B) to place the ground wire group in those locations.

select the entire Electrical Riser Power Diagram viewport. you duplicate an existing view and orient it to a section view in order to create an isometric detail view. and click Orient to View ➤ Sections ➤ Typical Make Up Air. In later exercises. 4 Right-click the ViewCube. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Prepare the view 1 In the Project Browser. 3 In the Rename View dialog.Pin wires and view You pin the view and all detail lines so that they don’t get moved accidentally. 58 Click Multi-Select tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Pin. and click Rename. right-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ HVAC-Duct ➤ 3D Views ➤ 3D Duct & Equipment. and click Duplicate View ➤ Duplicate. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_03_i. 5 Zoom in to view the section.rvt. You use a view template to isolate the mechanical components so that you can annotate the detail components. 2 Right-click the copy. and will place it on sheet E01. for Name. enter Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. 59 Close the file with or without saving it. 57 Using a crossing window (beginning at lower left and extending to upper right). In the left pane of the Open dialog. and click OK. you will create the Mechanical Connection Schedule referenced here. click Training Files. 348 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail In this exercise.

Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 349 .6 Select the section box. Back. and Left sides converge. click Home. 7 On the ViewCube. and then click the corner where the Top. and then press Esc. and drag the top grip down so that the section includes only the first floor.

Walkthroughs.Apply a view template 8 In the Project Browser. 350 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 13 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. select 3D HVAC Iso. select 3D Views. You hide this duct because it’s not part of the detail being created. 12 Click Place Text tab ➤ Element panel. and click Hide in view ➤ Elements. Hide elements in a view 10 Select the long rectangular duct at the rear. right-click. and select 3/32" Arial from the Type Selector drop-down. 9 In the View Templates dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Show Type. and click Apply View Template. right-click Typical Make Up Air Isometric Detail. Under Names. Click OK. This isolates the mechanical components by turning off the architectural components. Annotate the view 11 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

16 Select the text for the 8x8 duct. 19 Complete the text labels. and drag the controls to resize the text box as shown. Move the cursor to the left and click to specify the text insertion point. as shown. and click to specify the second leader point. Typical. Move the cursor down and to the left. 15 Using the same method. click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ Horizontal: 18 Press Esc. Enter Makeup Air Duct from AHU-1. Click Place Text tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Change text alignment 17 With the text still selected. Creating a Model-Based Isometric Detail | 351 . (Right). label the connecting duct 8x8 Makeup Air to Return Plenum (Provide Motorized Damper).14 Place the label: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Click on the long rectangular duct to start the leader.

open Sheets (all) ➤ M601-HVAC DUCT PLAN & SECTIONS. 24 Access the instance properties for the view. and use the drag controls to position the boundaries around the detail. as shown. under Extents. and then click OK. select Crop View and clear Crop Region Visible. and under Extents. type VP to open the instance properties for the view.To rotate and reposition a text label. 28 Drag the new isometric view from the Project Browser onto the sheet. 23 Click on the crop region. select the label and use the Drag and Rotate controls that display. 22 Zoom out so that the isometric detail and the crop region are both visible. Place the view on a sheet 27 In the Project Browser. 25 Click OK. Modify the view 20 In the drawing area. 26 Zoom to the drawing extents. select Crop Region Visible. 352 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 21 In the Instance Properties dialog.

Drafting Detail Components In this exercise. 30 Close the file with or without saving it. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Annotate the drafting view using keynotes and text notes. select the isometric view.29 In the drawing area. The new view is listed in the Project Browser under Views (Discipline) ➤ ??? ➤ ??? ➤ Drafting Views (Detail). and then select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. right-click the view name. Place a detail component. you: ■ ■ ■ ■ ■ Create a drafting view. select 3" = 1'-0". 2 In the New Drafting View dialog: ■ ■ ■ For Name. enter Typical Floor Drain Detail. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_04_i. 3 In the Project Browser. and click Properties. Use detail lines to create a detail group. you can more accurately locate the view in the Project Browser hierarchy. For Scale. Create a drafting view 1 Click View tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Drafting View. In the left pane of the Open dialog. click Training Files. Work with a filled region that represents a detail component.rvt. By defining a Sub-Discipline and a View Classification. Drafting Detail Components | 353 . Click OK.

14 Drag the cursor down and to the left so that the rectangle is 1' 8" x 5 1/2". and select Floor Drain with Waterproofing-Section from the Type Selector drop-down.4 In the Instance Properties dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Graphics. 9 Zoom in to the component. select Plumbing. Click OK. 12 On the Element panel. 8 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Selection panel ➤ Modify. Place a floor drain detail component 5 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component. select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 13 In the drawing area. For View Classification. 6 Click Place Detail Component tab ➤ Element panel. as shown. click the point at the top of the drain. 354 | Chapter 15 Detailing . 11 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ (Rectangle). Notice the new location of the view in the Project Browser. select Documentation. Use a filled region to create a concrete slab 10 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Region drop-down ➤ Region. for Sub-Discipline. 7 Click in the middle of the drawing area to place the component. as the rectangle start point.

Concrete. 18 With the filled region still selected. click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Arrange ➤ Send to Back drop-down ➤ Send to Back. Modify the boundary of the filled region You edit the boundary of the concrete slab so that it matches the contour of the metal deck. and then press Esc. for Type. click to select the indicated points in succession from left to right to define the new boundary. 27 Using the following illustration as a guide. click the bottom left corner of the filled region to specify the group insertion point. select C. select the filled region. and click OK.15 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Element panel ➤ Region Properties. 17 Click Create Filled Region Boundary tab ➤ Region panel ➤ Finish Region. 24 Click Modify Detail Items tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Edit Boundary. 20 Select 1. 25 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ 26 Zoom to the lower left corner of the filled region. Drafting Detail Components | 355 .5 NR 18 from the Type Selector drop-down.P. 22 Click Modify. 23 In the drawing area. 21 In the drawing area. 16 In the Instance Properties dialog. (Line).I. Add a structural metal deck detail group 19 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Group drop-down ➤ Place Detail Group.

and then select the base of the slab to the right of the line. 29 Highlight one of the lines you just drew. and then click point 6 as the endpoint. 32 Click point 1 to specify it as the start point. 34 Press Esc. 37 Select the small vertical line you just drew. 36 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Edit panel ➤ Trim. 35 Draw a line from the end of the last copied boundary line down to the base of the slab. select Multiple. 30 Click Modify Detail Items > Edit Boundary tab ➤ Modify panel ➤ Copy. 33 Click the endpoint of the copied chain as the start point for the next chain. 31 On the Options Bar. 356 | Chapter 15 Detailing .28 Click Modify. and then click to select them. press Tab to highlight the chain of lines.

38 Pan to the other end of the slab. 44 Click Place Detail Lines tab ➤ Draw panel ➤ This represents the vinyl composition flooring. as shown. The boundary of the slab now matches the contour of the metal deck. Drafting Detail Components | 357 . and then select the side of the slab above the line. 45 Using the method learned previously. 39 Select the line between points 1 and 2. and then press Esc. 43 Select Medium Lines from the Line Style drop-down. 40 Click Finish Region. 41 Type ZF to zoom out. (Rectangle). draw a rectangle on top of the filled region. Create a floor component 42 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line.

50 Highlight one of the wide lines. 54 Drag the origin point so that it snaps to the right endpoint of the detail lines. 52 In the Create Group dialog.D. 358 | Chapter 15 Detailing . enter Flashing Membrane_F. as shown.Create a detail group 46 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Detail Line. 48 Using the existing thin line as a guide. 49 Click Modify. Modify the group origin point 53 In the drawing area. and click OK. 51 Click Modify Lines tab ➤ Create panel ➤ Create Group. Notice that the origin point of the group is at the center. select the Flashing Membrane group. press Tab to highlight the chain. 47 Select Wide Lines from the Line Style drop-down. draw wide detail lines as shown. and then click to select them.. for Name.

60 Click the midpoint of the drain to specify the breakline location. Add breaklines 56 Type ZO to zoom out. 57 Click Annotate tab ➤ Detail panel ➤ Component drop-down ➤ Detail Component.55 Press Esc. Drafting Detail Components | 359 . 59 Press Spacebar 3 times to orient the component correctly. 58 Select Break Line from the Type Selector drop-down. 61 Using the same method. add a breakline at the midpoint of the slab’s left edge. as shown.

Modify breakline boundaries 63 Select the left breakline. 67 On the Options Bar. 69 Click twice to place the leader as shown. select the keynote and drag the text to the right. 65 Click Annotate tab ➤ Tag panel ➤ Keynote drop-down ➤ User. 70 In the Keynotes dialog. as shown. 66 Select Keynote Text from the Type Selector drop-down. 72 If necessary. 360 | Chapter 15 Detailing . select Division 22 ➤ 22 13 00 ➤ 22 13 16 ➤ 22 13 16. Add a keynote You begin annotating the detail components by adding a keynote for the floor drain object. 68 Select the top of the drain as the object to tag. 71 Click Modify.62 Press Esc twice. and then click OK. select Leader and Free End.A1 Floor Drain W/O Waterproofing. 64 Press Esc twice. and use the grips to resize the masking region.

and click to specify the text insertion point. 74 Click Place Text tab ➤ Leader panel ➤ Two Segments. click in the area indicated by the left arrow in the following image. 75 Click Place Text tab ➤ Alignment panel ➤ (Right). and then click anywhere in the view to finish editing. 81 Select the text note. 78 Move the cursor to the left. 79 Enter Adjustable Nickel Bronze Strainer with 4” Flange. Drafting Detail Components | 361 . and click to specify the second leader point. and use the drag controls to resize and move the text box as shown.Add text notes You add text notes to continue annotating the view. 77 Move the cursor up and to the left. 76 To select the leader start point. 80 Press Esc twice. 73 Click Annotate tab ➤ Text panel ➤ Text.

click to select the slab lines in the order indicated. 83 Click Annotate tab ➤ Dimension panel ➤ Aligned. 84 Using the following image as a guide.82 Continue annotating the detail. 362 | Chapter 15 Detailing . Add dimensions You add a dimension with multiple references. as shown.

and then press Esc twice. 90 Press Esc. select the view title. 87 Drag Typical Floor Drain Detail from the Project Browser to the top center of the sheet. 91 Close the file with or without saving it.85 Click to the left of the slab to place the dimension line. and click to place it. Place the detail on a sheet 86 In the Project Browser. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. Drafting Detail Components | 363 . 89 Select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. 88 In the drawing area.

For Import units. and open Imperial\06_Construction Documentation\RME_Docs_Detailing_05_i. and select Roof Drain Overflow Imperial. double-click Views (Discipline) ➤ Documentation ➤ Plumbing ➤ Drafting Views (Detail) ➤ Roof Drain Overflow Detail to make it the active view. click Training Files. 3 In the Import CAD Formats dialog: ■ Navigate to Training\Imperial\06_Construction Documentation. Import a CAD detail drawing 1 In the Project Browser. select 3. ■ ■ ■ ■ 4 Type ZF to zoom the view. 6 Click Manage tab ➤ Project Settings panel ➤ Settings drop-down ➤ Object Styles. Modify the CAD drawing line weight 5 Zoom to the left side of the detail. expand Roof Drains Overflow Imperial.dwg. In the left pane of the Open dialog. and modify line weight properties in the imported drawing. you import a CAD detail drawing.rvt. 2 Click Insert tab ➤ Import panel ➤ Import CAD. For Layers. For Colors. 7 On the Imported Objects tab of the Object Styles dialog: ■ ■ ■ Under Category. For A-----NPP. 364 | Chapter 15 Detailing .Importing a CAD Drawing In this exercise. select Auto-Detect. Click Open. select Black and White. Training File ■ ■ Click ➤ Open ➤ Project. Click OK. for Line Weight. select Visible.

12 In the drawing area. and select Viewport Square from the Type Selector drop-down. open P103 .Plumbing Part Plans & Details. and then press Esc. 15 Close the file with or without saving it. 10 Drag Roof Drain Overflow Detail from the Project Browser to the upper right of the sheet. select the viewport title. 14 Drag the title to the small space below the viewport.8 Type ZF. 11 Press Esc. 13 Click Modify Viewports tab ➤ Element panel. Place the detail on a sheet 9 In the Project Browser. Importing a CAD Drawing | 365 .

366 .

Sign up to vote on this title
UsefulNot useful